Konica 7060 Solutions

NSSG SUPPORT SOLUTIONS
7060 - ALL ACTIVE SOLUTIONS

November 2002
This document contains information that was exported directly from Konica's NSSG Support
knowledge base. Some solutions may contain hyperlink references which originally
contained links to graphic or text files. If you wish to view these files, you must access the
solutions via NSSG Web Support on Konica's website, www.konicabt.com.
Legal Notice
This document is designed as a diagnostic tool, primarily for Konica's support

personnel, and authorized service representatives. Konica recommends that
all service be performed by an authorized service representative. Users are
responsible for seeking advice of a Konica authorized service representative
regarding the information, opinion, advice or content of this document.
USER AGREES THAT USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS AT USER'S SOLE RISK

AND THAT THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OTHER
THAN THOSE WARRANTIES THAT ARE IMPLIED BY LAW AND INCAPABLE
OF EXCLUSION. IN NO EVENT WILL KONICA OR THOSE ACTING ON ITS
BEHALF BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT.
Copyright 2002, Konica Business Technologies, Inc.

7060
DESCRIPTION: DF310, intermittent jam position 14 when using the RADF. This jam will register as J62 in SOLUTION ID: 50,576
the data logs.
SOLUTION: [[Important note concerning changes to the DF310.| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc135.bmp SCROLL]] USAGE: 191
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The platen glass is dirty. Clean the platen glass with an approved glass cleaner.
2. The RADF is out of position. Check the RADF position using the RADF positioning blocks (p/n
12ER12073). See the DF310 service manual page 5 and 6 (dated 9/97).
3. The RADF height is not within specification. Use the height spacers (p/n 12ER12110). See the
DF310 service manual page 6 and 7 (dated 9/97).
4. The paper supply rubber (B) on the feed assembly is worn. Replace the supply rubber (p/n
12VR40100). The recommended replacement interval of the supply rubber is every 150,000 feeds.
5. The paper supply rubber (B) is installed backwards on the feed roller assembly. Remove the
feed roller assembly and verify that the white dot on the supply rubber (B) (p/n 12VR40100) faces
the same side as the coupling (p/n 12VR40460).
6. The original feed sensor (PS305) does not recognize the original. Clean PS305, and reseat the
connector to the sensor. Verify the operation of PS305. Measure the voltage at CN102-5 (yellow
wire) on the RADF CB to TP5 (power GND). With no paper present the reading should be 0.1V
DC. With paper present the reading should be 4.9V DC. If necessary replace PS305 (p/n
12ER85511).
7. The physical distance between the original transmission sensor (PS302) and the original feed
sensor (PS305) is too far apart. Physically shift the position of both sensors as closely together as
possible, without creating a constant jam indication.
8. The original push pressure plate has excessive tension (upward force). Adjust the pressure
plate by loosening the mounting screw and altering the spring tension with the adjustment screw
(one or both are paint locked screws). With the plate raised, use a gram gauge to push the plate
down. The pressure plate should break away from the feed tire at 115 to 135 grams. Note: For
accurate adjustment it is recommended that a 300g gram gauge (p/n 00TL-3040) be used.
9. Machines within the serial number range 55FE00001 to 55FE02088 are equipped with paper
supply rubber (B) (p/n 12VR40100) and torque limiters (p/n 12ER40362) on the DF310, which can
potentially cause original misfeeds. Order the paper feed kit (p/n DF310-001) which contains a
new torque limiter and paper supply rubber (B). Note: For best machine performance it is strongly
recommended that all main body EPROMs be upgraded to the [[latest release| FILE
V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] when the kit is installed. See DF310 [[Technical
Bulletin #1,| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\JRC143.bmp SCROLL]]
[[EPROM history, DF310| FILE V:\TEXT\EPROM\df-310.TXT NEW]].
[[EPROM history, 7060. | FILE V:\TEXT\EPROM\7060.TXT NEW]].
[[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\newrom\7060.txt]]
DESCRIPTION: EPROM history, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 50,780

SOLUTION: [[EPROM history, 7060. | FILE V:\TEXT\EPROM\7060.TXT NEW]]. USAGE: 168
[[Latest EPROM level hyperlink| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and [[Internal
Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7060.txt]]
See [[7060 EPROM Release Notification version 21.1| URL

http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060-21B.pdf]].
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060-21C.pdf]].
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060-21D.pdf]].
Note: To view the above PDFs, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be
downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
[[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html]]
See [[7060/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #21| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc117.bmp SCROLL]] for
features of Level 18.0 EPROMs.
*[[Trademark ownership information| FILE V:\TEXT\TRADEMRK.TXT NEW]]
Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

2
7060
DESCRIPTION: How to program the default paper tray. SOLUTION ID: 50,237
SOLUTION: Note: In order to program the default paper tray, a minimum EPROM level of 13 is required. USAGE: 147
The firmware listed above provides selection of default paper tray at power up under the following
conditions:
1. APS and ATS are both enabled.
2. If using Intersheet mode, chapter (copy insertion setting) and OHP are selected.
3. When the priority tray for APS is not selected or the tray is empty.
4. When ATS is selected during printer operation.
Set 25 mode dipswitches:

15-2 15-1 15-0
0 0 0 Standard search order - start at Tray 2 (Default)
0 0 1 Start at Tray 1 (1=>2=>3=>4=>5)
0 1 0 Start at Tray 2 (2=>3=>4=>5=>1)
0 1 1 Start at Tray 3 (3=>4=>5=>1=>2)
1 0 0 Start at Tray 4 (4=>5=>1=>2=>3)
1 0 1 Start at Tray 5 (5=>1=>2=>3=>4)
1 1 0 Standard search order - start at Tray 2
1 1 1 Standard search order - start at Tray 2
ALTERNATIVE METHOD
If older firmware is installed, the following procedure can be used:
1. To select Tray 5 as the default tray when APS is turned OFF, set 25 mode dipswitches 8-4 to 1,
8-5 to 0 and 8-6 to 1.
2. In the Key Operator Mode (power machine ON while pressing help), select memory switches.
a. Select #7 and turn OFF Platen APS.
b. Select #11 and turn OFF ATS/APS for Tray 3.
c. Select #14 and turn OFF Platen AMS.
The above programming allows the 7060 to default to the LT351 when copying from the platen
glass or when using the RADF in ATS/APS mode. Image rotation and mixed sized originals will
function as well.
Note: (Alternative solution) ATS for 8.5x11 Tray 3 will not operate and 8.5x11 will be the default
size when copying from the platen glass.
[[Latest EPROM level hyperlink| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and [[Internal
DESCRIPTION: Light copies. SOLUTION ID: 50,619

SOLUTION: PROBABLE CAUSES: USAGE: 140
1. DMAX and GAMMA initial settings were not performed at setup. Perform the DMAX and
GAMMA initial setting (47 mode code 18). This adjustment must be performed after the L detect
adjustment and before the laser gradation adjustment. This information is located on page 6-57 of
the 7060 Service Manual.
2. Density shift is displayed properly (data = 3), however the main CB does not recognize the
value.
Reset density shift values:
a. In idle mode press [P], then [5], then [START PRINT].
b. Enter [0] and press [START PRINT].
c. Enter [3] and press [START PRINT].
d. In idle mode press [P], then [6], then [START PRINT].
e. Enter [0] and press [START PRINT].
f. Enter [3] and press [START PRINT].
g. In idle mode press [P], then [7], then [START PRINT].
h. Enter [0] and press [START PRINT].
i. Enter [3] and press [START PRINT].
j. In idle mode press [P], then [8], then [START PRINT]
k. Enter [0] and press [START PRINT]. Note: P, 8 remains at 0.
3. Toner buildup at the entrance of the developer unit has caused a bind in the toner supply unit
damaging the toner drive gears. Replace damaged toner hopper drive gears. The worm gear may
be worn at the point of contact and is not driving the toner conveyance screw. Toner supply idler
gears A and B have been redesigned and are available as (p/n 25SA77291) for gear A and (p/n
25SA77311) for gear B. The new gears are black (old style are white).
Note: Replacing developer and performing L-detect is highly recommended after repairs have
been completed. After installing new developer, do not cycle machine until the following steps are

3
7060
complete:
a. Thoroughly clean the recycle tube.
b. Disengage the toner hopper from the developer unit.
c. Perform the L-detect adjustment. This information is found in 7060/FORCE 60/7150
[[Technical Bulletin #2B| IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\CJC101.bmp SCROLL]].
4. No ADD TONER indication. Open the toner hopper and inspect the level of toner. If the
amount of toner is below the Toner Level Detect (TLD) sensor, and no ADD TONER indication is
displayed perform the following;
a. Remove the TLD sensor.
b. Clean the sensor of all toner residue.
c. Reinstall the TLD.
d. Run 105 blank copies.
e. Verify the ADD TONER indication is on. If it is, add toner. If the ADD TONER indication does
not go on, replace the TLD sensor (p/n 540088030).
5. The mylar on the agitator plate, that wipes the TLD, is worn or missing. To prevent the toner
agitating seal from deforming and to ensure proper cleaning of the TLD sensor, a pressure spring
has been added to toner agitating plate B of the agitating plate assembly closest to the toner
detection sensor. Replace the agitator plate/2 assembly (p/n 25SA-3320) and the agitator plate
assembly (p/n 25SA-3271) as needed. Machines starting with serial number 55FE05655 have
been factory upgraded with this modification. See [[7060/7065/7150/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin
#30| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc216.bmp SCROLL]] for more information.
6. The main CB has failed. Replace the main CB (p/n 55FA-9010).
DESCRIPTION: Unable to adjust lead edge registration. SOLUTION ID: 50,204

1. The wrong mode was selected when performing the lead edge adjustment. There are two
modes, copier and printer. Ensure the correct mode is selected before performing the adjustment.
To perform the lead edge adjustment perform the following:
a. Enter the 36 mode.
b. From the adjustment mode screen, select 2 for timing adjustment.
c. From the timing adjustment mode screen, select 2 for restart timing adjustment.
d. The copier mode will adjust the lead edge position for all copies made in the VERY HIGH
MODE. Copier collective will adjust all trays to the same value. Pressing the next adjustment
button will allow individual adjustment of each tray. Note: After using the copier collective mode
and the machine is powered OFF/ON the data will read 0. The setting has been stored and can be
viewed in the individual settings.
e. Set an 11x17 original on the platen glass.
f. Press the copy screen button on the touchscreen. Note: The VERY HIGH light on the
operation panel will go on to indicate this mode is being adjusted.
g. Select 11x17 for the paper size.
h. Press the start print button, and visually check the lead edge timing.
i. If the lead edge timing is not within standard, press the C button while holding down the P
button; to return to the restart timing adjustment screen.
j. Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the touchscreen, then press the set key. Input
range -99 to 99. Note: One step is equal to 0.1 mm. Press the copy screen button and make a
copy.
k. Repeat the above steps until the standard is achieved.
Standard:
Main body without rotation ñ 3mm
Full system without rotation ñ 4mm
Main body with rotation ñ 4mm
Full system with rotation ñ 6mm
l. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
Note the following, common problem, unable to adjust:
To perform the lead edge adjustment for all copies NOT utilizing the VERY HIGH mode (E-RDH
memory), perform the following:
a. Enter the 36 mode.
b. From the adjustment mode screen, select 2 for timing adjustment.
c. From the timing adjustment mode screen, select 2 for restart timing adjustment.
d. Press the next adjustment button to scroll to (printer: collective). Note: This adjustment will
adjust all trays to the same value. Pressing the next adjustment button will allow individual
adjustment of each tray, or SIDE TWO. Note: After using the printer collective mode and the
machine is powered OFF/ON the data will read 0. The setting has been stored and can be viewed
in the individual settings.
e. Press the copy screen button on the touch screen.
f. Press the start print button, the machine will exit a self-generated 11x17 test chart. Visually
check the lead edge timing.
g. If the lead edge timing is not within standard, press the C button while holding down the P

4
7060

h. Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the touchscreen, then press the set key. Input
range -99 to 99. Note: One step is equal to 0.1 mm. Press the copy screen button and make a
copy.
i. Repeat the above steps until the standard is achieved.
Standard:
j. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
2. The adjustment value was changed by only one digit. Enter a value at least 10 higher, or 10
smaller, than the existing value. This will input a value that will change the registration by
approximately 1mm. This allows the change to be observed. Note: 1 step change = 0.1mm. Once
the registration is close, smaller values can be used to fine tune the image.
DESCRIPTION: Touchscreen keys are not working or do not select the correct function. SOLUTION ID: 49,957
1. The control panel adjustment is incorrect. This adjustment will shift the position of the touch
sensor of the LCD unit. Perform the following steps:
a. Hold the Help key and turn power ON.
b. Touch selection #10 (control panel adjustment) on the touch screen to display the control
panel adjustment screen. Note: If the touch screen is so far out of adjustment that there is no
response when touching #10, the control panel adjustment can be accessed (at this point) by
touching any numeric key on the 10-key pad.
Two + (plus signs) should be visible on the screen.
c. Touch the + at the upper right lightly with a touch pen (something with a round tip which is
made of resin is recommended as a touchpen). Check the coordinates displayed in the top line at
the top of the screen.
d. Ensure the X coordinate and the Y coordinate displayed in the message area fall within the
standard values. The acceptable values are on the second line.
e. If the values are not within the acceptable parameters, repeat Step 3 until the values are
acceptable.
f. Touch the + at the lower left lightly with a touch pen (something with a round tip which is made
of resin is recommended as a touch pen). Repeat the process used for the upper right coordinate
until acceptable values are achieved.
g. As verification of a correct adjustment, touch the CHECK keys at the upper left and lower
right corners. You should hear a beep tone for each one. If a beep tone is not heard, repeat the
adjustment.
h. Turn the machine OFF to store the adjustment. Turn the machine ON normally and check
operation of the touch screen.
2. Touch screen display does not respond or erratically flashes after installing version 15
EPROMs. Apparently ROM O4 (p/n 7060218-13.0) was mislabeled and is actually ROM O2 (p/n
7060217-13.0). It is possible that a few of these parts ordered before 10/6/98 have been released
to the field. Recommend ordering a new EPROM O2, and re-labeling or returning the old EPROM.
DESCRIPTION: CONNECTOR IN THE DEVELOPER UNIT IS DISENGAGED message. SOLUTION ID: 50,515
1. Toner is added to the machine prior to performing the L-detect adjustment. Excessive toner
mixes with the developer, preventing a true reading (density level exceeds the density detection
range). Or this area is not cleaned prior to doing the L-detect adjustment. Clean the sensor area
carefully and repeat L-detect adjustment. This information is found in 7060/FORCE 60/7150
[[Technical Bulletin #2B| IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\CJC101.bmp SCROLL]].
As an interim solution, perform the following:
a. Add toner prior to performing the L-detect adjustment, but leave the toner hopper swung
away from the machine.
b. Using the door switch jig (p/n 00M6-2-00), adjust the L-detection.
c. Set the toner supply unit once the L-detect adjustment is completed. The time it takes to
perform the L-detect allows toner in the hopper to settle, preventing an excessive amount of toner
from dumping into the developer.
2. A bad TCS (toner concentration sensor) or associated connector/wire is pinched or damaged.

Check continuity of the wire from the TCS to drum carriage connector to isolate problem. Replace
the TCS (p/n 25SA88030) if necessary.
3. A binding toner drive system causes the toner drive gear to break, sending false feedback to
main CB. Do not add toner before shipping the machine, as the toner will compact. Inspect the
toner drive system by removing motor cover (p/n 25SA32051). Replace the toner supply gear (p/n

5
7060
540077410) or other drive gears as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: E47-5 intermittently or shortly after power up. SOLUTION ID: 51,933
1. Loose connector. Reseat all connections between the write unit and the image processing
board.
2. Faulty write unit. Replace the write unit (p/n 55FA-6501).
DESCRIPTION: Memory specifications, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 51,639

SOLUTION: Note: Proper performance is guaranteed ONLY with Konica specified SIMM memory modules. USAGE: 55
Memory configuration and specifications are very complicated. As a result, purchase of memory
from a vendor may result in the wrong SIMM, although the product is of a high quality. The
following specifications are guidelines.
Konica 16MB SIMM modules 32MB SIMM modules (PCUA 950781) are available at 60 or 70ns,
with non-parity. These modules have tin plated contacts. The original 16MB SIMM in the E-RDH is
GOLD plated. EDO (Extended Data Output) can NOT be used.
Note: Some 60ns SIMMs are provided. 60ns memory can be used in combination with 70ns as
long as a 70ns SIMM is installed in bank 0 (in the first slot). The E-RDH does not require parity
memory.
Note: After installation of any memory, the memory check procedure should be performed.
Note: IP201 Memory is different; See IP201.
Volatile Memory Guarantee Statement
The Konica 7060 uses an E-RDH (Electronic Recirculating Document Handler). This E-RDH stores
each job in memory prior to printing. The standard E-RDH configuration is 16MB of memory. The
memory module used to achieve this is the 72-pin SIMM (Single Inline Memory Module) type. This
memory is volatile (i.e., all memory addresses on a module of this type are reset whenever power
is removed).
Optional configurations for the E-RDH allow for memory to be increased above the standard 16MB
configuration. This is done by adding other modules of the same type only, thus an optional
memory configuration would also be volatile.
The process of powering the Konica 7060 off via the main switch on its operation panel removes
power from the E-RDH, thus any information previously stored will be impossible to retrieve when
the power switch is turned on.
(Revision 1/28/97)
Self diagnostic capability to verify SIMM functionality is provided in 47 mode, output code 198:
Note: The E-RDH must be functional. (Verification of E-RDH function is part of the test sequence.)
Operating panel displays:
MEMORY CHECK OK indicates a good SIMM
MEMORY ERROR indicates a SIMM failure
a. Mount the SIMM to be tested on the E-RDH Board, enter 47 mode, output code 198 and
press START PRINT
b. Read the operation panel display.
If the display states: MEMORY CHECK OK, the SIMM is good. Install a new SIMM on the board
and repeat test.
If the display states: MEMORY ERROR, proceed to step c.
c. Mount a different SIMM, enter 47 mode, output mode 198 and press START PRINT
If the display states: MEMORY CHECK OK, this indicates that the SIMM from Step a has failed.
If the display states: MEMORY ERROR, proceed to step d.
d. Replace the E-RDH Board with a new one, install the SIMM from Step #1. Enter Mode 47
address 198 and press START PRINT
If the display states: MEMORY CHECK OK, this indicates that the SIMM access function of the
original E-RDH has failed. Use the new E-RDH board to perform the SIMM checking procedure.
Notes:
1. This check is used only to verify SIMM condition - not the E-RDH board except to determine its
SIMM access function.
2. A maximum of 4 SIMMs can be mounted
a. The Memory Check OK message will only display if all 4 SIMMs are good.
b. If any 1 fails, Memory Error will display and each SIMM must be checked to determine which
has failed.
[[Konica Specified SIMM Memory module| IMAGE v:\bitmaps\gjm007.bmp SCROLL]]

6
7060
DESCRIPTION: F51-6, polygon mirror motor (M5) noisy at power up. SOLUTION ID: 51,056
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The adhesive holding the magnet yokes in the polygon mirror may loosen causing the USAGE: 54
yokes to contact the motor shaft.
SOLUTION: Replace the write unit (p/n 55FA-6501). See 7060 [[Technical Bulletin #10.| IMAGE
V:\BITMAPS\JRC142.BMP SCROLL]] Serial numbers of affected machines are provided.
CAUTION: Do not remove the polygon motor cover. The 7060 polygon motor rotates on an air
bearing. Removal of this cover may allow foreign matter to enter, eventually causing the bearing to
fail, resulting in noise or failure code. The [[polygon cover| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJH071.BMP
SCROLL]], (p/n 25SA-6690) can be removed if desired. The motor cover, should not be removed
for any reason. The 7050 motor has no air bearing and therefore does not have the same access
restriction.
DESCRIPTION: No power. SOLUTION ID: 54,618

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The DCPS has failed. USAGE: 51
SOLUTION: With the main switch (SW1) ON, check for 115V AC at CN397-1 and CN397-2 on the
DCPS. If present, check for 24V DC at CN2-1 and CN2-2 and 5V DC at CN8-9 and CN8-10 on the
DCPS. If not present, power the machine OFF and remove all connectors from the DCPS except
CN382, CN395, CN396, CN397, CN398, and CN8. Then power the machine ON. Check for 24V
and 5V directly off of the DCPS at the pins previously checked. If voltages are still not present,
replace the DCPS (p/n 55FA84511).
Note: Check ICP4 and ICP5 to see if they are open. If they are, the DCPS may have been
damaged by a bind in the Tray 3 and Tray 4 up/down motor, or related parts. Do not replace the
DCPS if ICP4 and ICP5 are open, without first checking for binding, as this may cause the DCPS to
fail again.
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, required EPROM configuration. SOLUTION ID: 50,419

SOLUTION: A Tandem Copy kit (PCUA 950792) is required. Tandem EPROMs (level 10.0) are supplied in the USAGE: 51
kit. Konica recommends upgrading to a minimum of level 14.0, which includes the latest
enhancements and supports the FS-103B. In addition Tandem EPROM's are available through the
BBS at address 7060T-14.EXE and through the Parts Distribution Center as the following part
numbers:
Main CB
C1, IC22 (p/n 7060T122-14.0)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060T123-14.0)
Operation panel
O1, IC16 (p/n 7060216-14.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060217-13.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060212-13.0)
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060218-14.0)
Image processing board

I1, IC29 (p/n 7060B29-17.0)
I2, IC30 (p/n 7060B30-17.0)
DF310 RADF CB
IC7 (p/n DF31035-12.0)
FS103B Main CB
IC2 (Level 10.0)
No change has been made since product release.
The above list is the minimum recommended configuration.
Note: Tandem printing is now available with the IP302.
[[Latest 7060 Tandem Copier EPROM hyperlink| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060T.txt NEW

NoWordWrap]] and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN
V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7060T.txt]]
[[7060 Tandem level 15 firmware enhancement list in Adobe* Acrobat* format.| URL
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060t-15.pdf]].
Note: To view the PDF, Acrobat Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for
free from the Adobe Web site at: [[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL

7
7060
DESCRIPTION: ECM information, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 50,321

SOLUTION: 1. How to turn ON/OFF the ECM function: USAGE: 49
a. Enter the key operator mode by holding down the help button while turning on the machine.
b. Select #3 on the touch screen,
c. Enter the 8 digit master code and press OK.
d. Select #4 from the ECM screen which is ECM ON/OFF.
2. How to set a users copy limit for unlimited copies.

To set the users copy limit to unlimited the counter must be set to all nines (999,999).
Note: Zero settings will not work. If set to zero, when user enters his password the display will
show COPY LIMIT REACHED.
3. How to clear the ECM after a copy has been made.

Press and hold the (P) button and then press the (Clear) button.
4. How to increase the amount of time before reset to ENTER PASSWORD in ECM mode
(increase the reset timer in the ECM).
a. While pressing (HELP), turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and touch OK
to display the Key Operator Mode Screen.
b. Touch (9) Memory switch. Memory Switch Screen will be displayed.
c. No.1: Auto reset timer is the first option.
d. Press the (Change Setting Contents) to select the reset time you prefer, from OFF to 300
seconds in intervals of 30 seconds.
If no further changes are required, touch (Previous Screen).
e. Turn power OFF.
Note: See the 7060 User's Manual on pages 10-43 through 10-45.
DESCRIPTION: Drum wrap or separation jam. SOLUTION ID: 51,683

1. The separation claw is not contacting the drum. Inspect the operation of the separation claw
(p/n 55FA-2030). Ensure the [[separation claw| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJH072.BMP SCROLL]] is not
contacting the toner control sensor PCB (p/n 25SA-9100). If claw is contacting board, the rocking
arm (p/n 25SA20531 may be bent , the shaft can be straightened or replaced, it should have 1MM
of clearance between the claws and the TCB.
2. Insufficient DC separation current data. Confirm DC separation data in the 36 mode, item #1
High Voltage Auto Adjustment, #5 DC Separation Adjustment. This data value should be above
100 when you are experiencing separation jams. Before changing the data, document original data
in safe place for reference. Then set to 100, 105, 110, or 115 until best results are achieved.
3. Check the resistance of the drum grounding from the coupling to the frame ground, The value
should be 1 ohm, not 7 - 8 ohms. Check for excessive amounts of grease from the drum shaft
holder front and rear (p/n 25SA75010). Clean the excess grease from this area and again measure
for resistance. If the value is still up to 3 ohms. A new ground strap to the front bearing may be
needed, use (p/n 25SA15280) it may need to be straighted for this uses.
Note: This earth spring is a ground for the cleaning blade and the toner hold plate. It conducts via
the shaft PS material (p/n 25SA20460) this a conductive/plastic material.
4. The second paper feed front mylar is incorrectly positioned on the top plate instead of the lower
plate. Reposition the mylar on the lower plate.
DESCRIPTION: How to print out ECM/Service Data information. SOLUTION ID: 50,639
SOLUTION: There are two sections of information that can be printed. The first method prints out the ECM USAGE: 47
information, specifically; (1) Copy quantity for each ECM password, (2) Copy limit for each ECM
password, (3) Copy quantity for each paper size.
To print out the ECM information, perform the following steps;
1. Enter a 5 digit passcode.
2. Press (P).
3. Press 9.
4. Press the Start/Print key.
5. Enter 8 digit master key code.
6. Press the Start/Print key.
7. Press number of desired data mode 1-3 and press the Start/Print key.
8. Once desired information is printed, turn the machine OFF/ON.
The second method prints out the service logs 40-47. Page 6-49 and 6-50 of the 7060 Technical
Manual dated September 1997, provides the details of what items are found in each log 40-47 and
a corresponding data list is on pages 6-12 through 6-16. (As an example 46 will print out the list of

8
7060
failure code occurrences and the corresponding chart is listed on page 6-12)
To print out this Service Data information, perform the following;
1. Enter the 36 mode by holding down the number 3 and 6 keys while turning the main switch ON.
2. The 36 screen should now be displayed. Touch selection number 4 on the touch screen for
Test Pattern Output.
3. At the Test Pattern Output screen, enter the number corresponding to the data to be printed.
Press the SET key. (Use either the touch screen or the numeric display.)
Note: In order to access all print outs, software dip switch 8-7 must be set to 1.
4. Press the COPY SCREEN key.
5. The display should read *ADJUSTMENT MODE*. Press START PRINT. The data log
corresponding to the selection should now print.
6. To access another data log, press the C key while holding down the P key and repeat the
procedure starting with step 3.
7. To exit the Test Pattern Output Mode, press PREVIOUS SCREEN on the touch screen.
6. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, not recognized. Paper jams at the entrance of the finisher, but no jam code is SOLUTION ID: 61,536
displayed.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The copier needs an EPROM level upgrade to provide recognition of the FS103B finisher. USAGE: 43
SOLUTION: Upgrade the EPROMs to [[the current level | FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW
NoWordWrap]] ([[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\newrom\7060.txt]]).
Further information is available in the Info Source publication to dealers, released 12/11/98, issue
no. 82-98.
DESCRIPTION: Front door is open displayed continuously. SOLUTION ID: 50,790

1. The front door is open. Ensure the front door is closed. Check the door actuator to ensure it is
tight and positioned properly.
2. One of the plastic tabs that secures the magnet catch to the operation panel/lower may break.
A new magnet catch holder (p/n 25SAK0020) can be installed without removing the remaining tab.
This eliminates the need to replace the operation panel/lower. See [[7060 Technical Bulletin #11|
IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJC094.bmp SCROLL]].
3. Loss of 24V DC from the DCPS. Remove all 24V DC connections from the DCPS. Turn the
machine on in the 47 mode. Verify all 24V DC pins on the DCPS have 24V DC. If they do,
reconnect 24V DC connectors one at a time until the 24V DC drops to 0V DC. Then trace the
wiring for that connector until the pinched wire (short) is found. If all 24V DC loads are
disconnected from the DCPS and there is no voltage on the pins, replace the DCPS (p/n
55FA84510).
DESCRIPTION: FRONT DOOR IS OPEN PLEASE CLOSE message will not clear. SOLUTION ID: 52,885
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Faulty LCT motor (M140) causing DC power supply failure. USAGE: 41
SOLUTION: Turn off the machine and unplug it from the AC outlet. Ohm CN88-5 of the DCPS to
frame ground. If it is shorted, M140 or it's wiring harness is shorted. Verify the wiring harness by
disconnecting M140 and ohming the wiring to ground. If the wiring open to ground, Replace M140
(p/n 55FA-1820) and the DC power supply (p/n 55FA84512).
DESCRIPTION: How to program auto shut-off and/or auto low power mode(s). SOLUTION ID: 50,119
SOLUTION: To program the auto shut-off/auto low power mode(s), perform the following: USAGE: 40
1. Access the key operator mode (power the machine ON while holding down the HELP key).
2. If the ECM is enabled, enter a valid password. If ECM is OFF proceed to Step 3.
3. On the touch screen, press the down ARROW to display additional menu items.
4. Select #11: AUTO LOW POWER/AUTO SHUT OFF.
5. Select the desired time settings for each mode (5 - 240 minutes for Auto Low Power; 30 - 240
minutes for Auto Shut-off).
6. At the bottom of the programming screen press NEXT SETTING and select ON or OFF for Auto
Shut-off (Auto Low Power cannot be disabled).
Notes:
1. Auto shut-off should not be used when the 7060 is utilized as a printer.
2. This information is found on page 10-49 of the7060 User's Reference Guide.

9
7060
DESCRIPTION: Drum cleaning blade flipping. Drum damage. SOLUTION ID: 56,397
1. Excessive friction between the front edge of the cleaning blade and the non-coated surface of
the drum may cause the cleaning blade to flip in the opposite direction.
Install the new style cleaning blade (p/n 55WA20020), which reduces the risk of the blade flipping
by using a different material in the location where the cleaning blade contacts the non-coated area
of the drum.
Note: Before installing the cleaning blade, apply toner to 20mm of the front and rear edges of the
cleaning blade. The newly installed Urethane part of the blade does not need to be coated with
toner. See [[7060/FORCE 60/7065/7150 Technical Bulletin #36.| IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\blade.bmp
SCROLL]]
2. Non-Konica brand drums and setting powder were used. Use Konica setting powder (p/n
000V-19-0) and drums (PCUA 950786).
DESCRIPTION: E46-6. SOLUTION ID: 51,072

SOLUTION: Note: This failure code indicates a problem with either the Image Processing board, E-RDH board, USAGE: 38
or main CB.
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. SIMMs on the E-RDH board. Check for damaged pins or correct memory modules. Replace as
necessary.
2. Failed E-RDH board. Remove the E-RDH board and inspect each wiring harness for backed
out pins or mis-seated connectors. Pay close attention to the rear connector of the E-RDH board to
the E-RDH I/F board. Reassemble and verify operation. If error still occurs, replace the E-RDH
board (p/n 55FA-9620).
DESCRIPTION: 7060 supplies information. SOLUTION ID: 49,615

SOLUTION: The 7060 and 7050 toner have different PCUA numbers. In addition the 7060 and 7050 cartridges USAGE: 37
are keyed so that they are not interchangeable. An attempt to make the 7050 cartridge fit into the
7060 may result in toner hopper damage and toner spillage.
PCUA numbers are as follows:

Toner PCUA 950787.
Developer PCUA 950754.
Staples (FS-103A) PCUA 950764.
Drum PCUA 950786.
DESCRIPTION: Noise from Tray 3. SOLUTION ID: 52,856

SOLUTION: CAUSE: If a popping noise occurs when feeding from Tray 3, the paper exit gear and LCT drive USAGE: 36
gear are worn (the gear teeth become pointed). These gears drive the LCT feed and conveyance.
They are positioned by a spring-tensioned rocking plate, and the spring is not providing enough
tension to keep the gears meshed properly.
SOLUTION: Replace the paper exit gear (p/n 193075520) and the LCT drive gear (p/n
25SA77430). The tension spring (p/n 12EJ15120) may also require replacement or modification.
Also replaced shaft (p/n 25SA57360) and two bushings (p/n008478610).
DESCRIPTION: What is required to set up the 7060 and IP302 as a printer? SOLUTION ID: 52,815
SOLUTION: To set up the 7060 and IP302 as a printer, update the EPROMs in the 7060 to level 16. Level 16 USAGE: 35
EPROMs are available from Konica's website as 7060-16A.EXE and through the Parts Distribution
Center as the following part numbers:
Main CB
C1, IC22 (p/n 7060122-18.0)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060123-18.0)

I1, IC29 (p/n 7060B29-17.0)
I2, IC30 (p/n 7060B30-17.0)
Operation panel
O1, IC16 (p/n 7060216-14.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060217-13.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060212-13.0)

10
7060
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060218-14.0)
The IP302 controller should be updated to the latest IP system software. The latest version system
software is available on the Konica [[FTP site| FILE V:\text\CBC009.txt NEW NoWordWrap]]. Refer
to the [[FTP_ user site.txt file| FILE V:\text\CBC010.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] on the FTP site for
detailed information concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site
information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing
FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
[[Latest 7060 EPROM hyperlink| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and [[Internal
DESCRIPTION: Partially blank copies when copying non standard originals from the platen glass and SOLUTION ID: 51,712
manually selecting the correct paper size. Optics only scans to 11 inches.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Memory dip switch #4 is set incorrectly. USAGE: 34
SOLUTION: Reprogram memory switch by performing the following:

a. Turn OFF the main power switch.
b. While pressing and holding the (Help) key on the operation panel, turn the main power switch
ON. Release the (Help) key after approximately 3 seconds.
c. Press 9, memory switches.
d. Using the up arrow key, scroll to 4 Erasure Outside Area of Original.
e. Press the (Change Contents) button so that Erased for APS/AMS only is displayed.
f. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
DESCRIPTION: Latest EPROM level, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 60,566

SOLUTION: [[Latest EPROM level| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and [[Internal Link for USAGE: 33
Faxing/Printing current 7060 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe

http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060-21j.pdf]].
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060-21B.pdf]].
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060-21C.pdf]].
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060-21D.pdf]].
Note: To view the above PDFs, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be
See [[7060/7065/7150/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #32| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc227.bmp
SCROLL]] for features of level 20.0 EPROMs and level 14.0 Tandem EPROMs.
DESCRIPTION: Table Data error message when tray 1 is used, or Tray 1 shows SPECIAL paper after SOLUTION ID: 54,455
installing the video interface kit.
SOLUTION: CAUSE : Improper EPROMs in the operation panel. USAGE: 33
SOLUTION: When installing the video interface kit, ensure the EPROMs are a minimum level of:
Main CB
IC22 (p/n 7060122-15.0)
IC23 (p/n 7060123-15.0)
Operation panel
ROM1, IC16 (p/n 7060216-14.0)
ROM2, IC17 (p/n 7060217-13.0)
ROM3, IC12 (p/n 7060212-13.0)
ROM4, IC18 (p/n 7060218-13.0)
Note: On level 13 operation board ROM4 will display as a 11 when viewed in 25 mode, address 9.
This is only a problem with the display, not with the functionality of the EPROM.

11
7060
IC29 (p/n 7060B29-16.0)

IC30 (p/n 7060B30-16.0)
DF310 RADF CB
IC7 (p/n DF31035-11.0)
FS103A Main CB
IC5 (p/n FS103AA7-12.0)
[[Latest level 7060 EPROM hyperlink| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, can one machine be used as a printer at the same time? SOLUTION ID: 54,210
SOLUTION: Tandem copier configuration cannot be connected to the IP302 print controller. There is no ability USAGE: 33
to connect two 7060s as tandem copiers and make one of them a printer at the same time. The
tandem copy kit (PCUA 950792) is for copying only.
There is a tandem printing kit (PCUA 950806) available for the the 7060 using an IP302. This
allows the use of the 7060 as a copier, but does not allow tandem copying.
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, E46-2, E46-12, or reversed image from the sub-copier. SOLUTION ID: 53,285
1. There is an image processing board EPROM incompatibility.
Upgrade the EPROMs to the latest revision. Tandem EPROMs (level 10.0) are supplied in the kit.
Konica recommends upgrading to level 12.0, which includes the latest enhancements.. In addition
Tandem EPROM's are available through the BBS at address 7060T-12.EXE and through the Parts
Distribution Center as p/n:
Main CB
C1, IC22 (p/n 7060T122-12.0)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060T123-12.0)
Operation panel
O1, IC16 (p/n 7060T216-12.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060T217-12.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060T212-12.0)
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060T218-12.0)

I1, IC29 (p/n 7060B29-16.0)
I2, IC30 (p/n 7060B30-16.0)
DF310 RADF CB
IC7 (p/n DF31035-11.0)
FS103A Main CB
IC5 (p/n FS103AA7-12.0)
The above list is the minimum configuration. [[Latest 7060 Tandem Copier EPROM hyperlink| FILE
V:\text\NewROM\7060T.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM
information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7060T.txt]]
2. The EPROMS on the image processing board are not seated properly.
Remove and reinstall the EPROMS on the image processing board.
DESCRIPTION: How to program 8.5x11 default paper size for small originals. SOLUTION ID: 50,651
SOLUTION: To program the copier to default to 8.5x11 when small originals are placed on the platen, set USAGE: 31
dipswitches 7-4 and 7-5 to 1.
The following is a complete listing of settings for the dipswitches:

7-4 7-5 Size Selected
0 0 8.5x11R
0 1 8.5x11R
1 0 8.5x11R
1 1 8.5x11
DESCRIPTION: When feeding an 11x15 original through the RADF in full auto mode the machine does not SOLUTION ID: 53,409
copy the entire image from front to rear onto 8.5x11R paper.

12
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: In full auto mode or AMS mode the RADF will detect 11x15 as 8.5x14 paper causing the USAGE: 27
image loss.
SOLUTION: To copy 11x15 onto 8.5x11R, perform the following:

1. Power the machine OFF.
2. While holding down the help button power the machine ON.
3. Use the up arrow to increment to memory switch number 4.
4. Verify that the displays reads [erased for APS/AMS only].
5. If not, press the change setting contents button.
6. Power the machine OFF/ON.
7. Disable the AMS by manually selecting the lens mode button.
8. Press the zoom button, enter 7 then 3 from the touch screen for a 73% reduction. Press the OK
button.
9. Either set the universal tray for 8.5x11R or use the bypass tray. This should allow copying onto
8.5x11R with no image loss.
Note: 8.5x11 paper cannot be used due to auto rotation. Auto rotation uses the paper size
detected by the RADF which will detect the original as 8.5x14.
DESCRIPTION: F51-2 at power up. SOLUTION ID: 71,322

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Fusing unit lower roller shaft holders are bound up, which is creating a bind to the M1 USAGE: 26
drive system.
SOLUTION: Replace the lower roller shaft holders (p/n 25BA76030), front release lever (p/n
55FA53051) and rear release lever (p/n 55FA53061) as a set.
Notes:
1. M1 may appear to operate normally in diagnostics (47 mode, output code 40).
2. M1 provides drive to the following:
a. Fusing unit
b. ADU Paper Exit/conveyance unit (from the fusing unit)
c. Conveyance belt
d. Toner conveyance screw via Cleaner clutch (MC10)
e. 2nd paper feed rollers via 2nd paper feed clutch (MC3)
3. The lower roller shaft holders, front and rear release levers are all new style and must be
replaced as a set the 1st time.
a. The heat insulating sleeves are no longer used with the new style shaft holders.
b. This parts change is detailed in parts information bulletin #92 (11/30/98).
DESCRIPTION: FS103, poor paper alignment in staple mode. SOLUTION ID: 64,681
Note: The following adjustments are covered in [[FS103/FS103A Technical Bulletin #5| IMAGE
V:\bitmaps\cjc102.bmp SCROLL]].
1. Middle sponge roller is damaged or worn. Inspect the middle sponge roller (p/n 12QR45251). If
it is damaged or worn, replace it as needed.
2. Belt tension for stacker entrance motor is incorrect. Check the belt tension of the stacker
entrance motor (M14). The correct tension is 1.0 ñ 0.01kg. If adjustment is required, loosen the
screw on M14 and move it to adjust the tension.
3. Belt tension for connecting belt is incorrect. Adjust the tension of the connecting belt. Loosen
the screw that secures the tension roller for the connecting part belt. Adjust the tension roller
position to balance the tension spring and belt tension. Note that the belt tension is effected by the
tension roller position. Ensure that the roller does not shift when tightening the screws.
4. Belt tension for the paper exit roller motor is incorrect. Adjust the paper exit roller motor (M7)
belt tension. Loosen the four screws that secure M7 and move it to adjust the tension.
5. The belt detection gear is out of adjustment. Ensure that the belt detection gear is adjusted
correctly. See FS103/FS103A Technical Bulletin #5 for proper adjustment.
DESCRIPTION: NO TABLE DATA. UNDEFINED SCREEN CODE 1003H message when Universal tray is SOLUTION ID: 62,846
selected.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect EPROMs installed on the operation panel board. USAGE: 25
SOLUTION: Install the minimum of level 16 EPROMs (available from Konica's website as
7060-16A.EXE and through the Parts Distribution Center).
Main C B
IC22 (p/n 7060122-16.0)

13
7060
IC23 (p/n 7060123-16.0)
Operation panel
ROM1, IC16 (p/n 7060216-14.0)
ROM2, IC17 (p/n 7060217-13.0)
ROM3, IC12 (p/n 7060212-13.0)
ROM4, IC18 (p/n 7060218-14.0)

IC29 (p/n 7060B29-17.0)
IC30 (p/n 7060B30-17.0)
The above list is the minimum configuration.
DESCRIPTION: J17-3 when duplexing out of Tray 4 only. SOLUTION ID: 78,426
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A worn paper conveyance roller in the Tray 4 feed system. This roller drives two white USAGE: 25
plastic rollers. As the roller wears on each side from contact with the two plastic rollers, the
circumference of each side of the roller becomes smaller giving the appearance of a bulge in the
center of the roller.
SOLUTION: Replace the paper conveyance roller (p/n 25SA59170).
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent black lines on the copy. SOLUTION ID: 53,478

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Damaged/inoperable memory module on the E-RDH board. USAGE: 25
SOLUTION: Remove memory modules one at a time to determine which module is causing the
problem and replace the module.
DESCRIPTION: How to set the toner supply stop mode. SOLUTION ID: 52,501
SOLUTION: To set the toner supply stop mode: USAGE: 24
1. Enter the memory rewrite mode by turning the copier on while pressing the 2 and 5 keys.
Release the 2 and 5 keys when the (25 Mode Menu Screen) appears.
2. Select [1] (Software switch setting).
3. From the (Software SW Setting Screen) use the arrows to select and change the following dip
switches:
7-0 to a 1 to enable the toner supply stop function.
7-1 to a 1 to have the copier stop after the need for toner is detected and the number of copies set
by 7-2 and 7-3 are completed.
a. 7-2 and 7-3 to 0 for 100 copies.
b. 7-2 to a 1 and 7-3 to a 0 for 1000 copies.
c. 7-2 to a 0 and 7-3 to a 1 for 2000 copies.
d. 7-2 and 7-3 to a 1 for 3000 copies.
Note: The recommended setting is for 100 copies.
7-1 to a 0 to have the copier stop immediately after the need for toner is detected and one copy is
completed.
DESCRIPTION: The trail edge of the copy is faded and light on the second side. SOLUTION ID: 51,382
1. The memory switches in the key operator mode #4 and #5 are not set for zero deletion on the
copies. Set memory switches #4 and #5 to the desired setting for the least amount of trail edge
deletion.
2. The DC separation current is too high for the paper and environmental conditions, which is
resulting in a residual charge remaining on the paper after the first side has been copied and
transferred. To change the DC separation current, perform the following:
a. Power the copier OFF.
b. Access the 36 mode (power the copier ON, while pressing the 3 and 6 keys).
c. Touch [1. High voltage auto adjust] on the touchscreen.
d. Touch [Next adjustment], which is located on the lower left corner of the touchscreen 3 times.
e. [HV adjustment (separation DC)] will be displayed in the dark blue band at the top of the
touchscreen, along with the current setting (usually in the vicinity of 94).
f. Reduce the current value by 10 and enter it as the new setting. Press the [SET] key on the
touchscreen.
g. Power the copier OFF/ON to exit the 36 mode and check the copy quality.
14
7060
h. Repeat steps (1) through (7) until the 2nd side trail edge is properly transferred.
i. Repeat steps (1) through (3).
j. Touch [Next adjustment], which is located on the lower left corner of the touchscreen 8 times.
k. [HV adjustment (separation DC) 600dpi] will be displayed in the dark blue band at the top of
the touchscreen, along with the current setting.
l. Set the (separation DC 600dpi) value the same as the final value entered for (separation DC)
at the completion of step (8).
Note: This adjustment is only recommended for use in specific instances, where the environmental
conditions are adversely affecting image transfer. In no case should the (separation DC) or
(separation DC 600dpi) setting be set below 40.
DESCRIPTION: Displays warm-up mode message after a copy job is completed. The user may wait for a SOLUTION ID: 50,593
variable amount of time until the device returns to READY.
SOLUTION: This is normal operation. An automatic 'Dmax' adjustment is performed at every 1,000 copy/print USAGE: 24
interval to ensure optimum copy/print quality through out the PM (developer life) cycle of 150,000
prints.
During the Dmax adjustment, the warm-up mode message will be displayed. The duration of the
Dmax sampling will vary based on developer condition and toner concentration level. This function
will not interrupt the customer's current job, but will wait until the current job is completed.
DESCRIPTION: Jam position 6 during first paper feed. Paper does not make it to the second feed rollers. SOLUTION ID: 52,506
1. The paper feed motor (M140) is not operating properly. Check motor operation in 47
multimode, output code 021, press P-02-P. The motor should run continuously in this mode.
Reseat CN120 on the main CB and CN203 and CN204 on M140. Inspect the wiring between those
connectors for any signs of damage. If problem persists, replace M140 (p/n 55FA-1820)
2. The pressure between the conveyance roller and the paper feed driven shaft is insufficient.
The paper feed driven shaft is contacting the guide plate which is limiting pressure between the
rollers. Replace the paper feed driven shaft with the new style (p/n 55FA40371). The [[shaft's
diameter| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJH062.BMP SCROLL]] has been reduced to allow firm contact with
the conveyance roller. This change has been factory installed on machines with serial number
55FE01024 and above.
DESCRIPTION: E46-3 during the copy process. SOLUTION ID: 50,538

SOLUTION: Note: E46-3 Indicates a problem with either the Image Processing board, E-RDH board, or Main USAGE: 23
CB.
CAUSE: One of the 32MB SIMMs memory chips is defective.
SOLUTION: Swap out the SIMMs chips one at a time to isolate the defective chip.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, finisher jamming. SOLUTION ID: 51,079

1. The return spring on the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) is weak or broken. Replace the
return spring with upgraded spring (p/n 12QR47131). For an interim fix a new loop can be created
on the end of the old spring. Verify the operation of SD4; use the 47 mode, output code 75, multi
mode 32. The solenoid must be adjusted if the spring is modified. This information is found in
FS103 [[Technical Bulletin #3A| IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\CJH064.bmp SCROLL]].
2. The paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) needs adjustment. Perform the following adjustments:
Adjust the solenoid throw to 5.0 mm. (Note: If solenoid throw is not adjusted first, the other
adjustments will not resolve the problem.) The final measurement: SD4 energized, a clearance of
1.5 plus/minus 0.5 mm between the [[paper exit guide upper | IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\CJH045.bmp
SCROLL]] (p/n 12QR47010) and paper exit (sponge) roller (p/n 12QR48250). Note: additional
paper exit guide movement can be achieved by loosening the [[screws that mount the rotorary
stopper| IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\CJH044.bmp SCROLL]] (p/n 12QR47120) and solenoid lever (p/n
12QR47110). This information is found in FS103 [[Technical Bulletin #3A| IMAGE
V:\BITMAPS\CJH064.bmp SCROLL]].
3. FS103 paper exit motor (belt tension) is insufficient causing a timing problem (factory
adjustment may be insufficient).
Increase belt tension by scribing the current position of the [[tension plate| IMAGE
V:\BITMAPS\CJH046.bmp SCROLL]], (p/n 12QR-2100) and adjusting 1mm to the left.
CAUTION:
Do not over tighten belt tension. In some cases and finishers with serial numbers 12QS08057 for
FS103 and 12HJ00017 for FS103A, replacement of the paper exit roller motor (p/n 12QR80032)
may be necessary. This information is found in FS103 [[Technical Bulletin #3A| IMAGE
15
7060
V:\BITMAPS\CJH064.bmp SCROLL]].
4. The screws that secure the following sensor assemblies are too tight; causing the actuators to
bind, resulting in intermittent codes. Check the serial number of the finisher. If it is below
12QS03160, ensure the screws that mount the following sensors are not overtightened. Use some
type of thread lock agent to prevent the screws from loosening completely.
The finisher entrance passage detect sensor (PS4).
The stacker conveyance passage detect sensor (PS5).
The paper exit 1 detect sensor (PS6).
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, intermittent misstapling. SOLUTION ID: 56,608

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The paper exit belt home position sensor (PS9) is not changing state. USAGE: 21
SOLUTION: Enter the 47 multimode, input code 76, press P-008-P. Flag the sensor and watch for
a change of state. If no change is observed, ensure PS9 is clean. If necessary replace the sensor
(p/n 552085510).
DESCRIPTION: How to program the mixed original feature for initialization. SOLUTION ID: 50,637
SOLUTION: To program the mixed original feature at initialization, perform the following: USAGE: 21
1. Access the key operator mode by powering ON the machine while pressing the HELP key.
2. Press Item No. 9, MEMORY SWITCH.
3. Press the down arrow and select Item No. 18, JOB MEMORY AUTO RECALL FUNCTION.
Turn ON this feature.
4. Exit the key operator mode and select APPLICATIONS.
5. On the touchscreen, press MIXED ORIGINAL, then press OK.
Note: Select any other feature that you require like, paper selection for reduced sizes.
6. Press the JOB MEMORY key, then press STORE on the touchscreen. Press OK after viewing
the settings to be stored.
7. Access job number 15 by pressing the right arrow twice.
8. Press job number 15, then press OK twice.
9. Power the machine OFF/ON. The APPLICATION LED should be lit, and MIXED ORIGINAL
should be selected.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, the paper exit tray fails to lower and the exit roller is damaged. SOLUTION ID: 52,877
SOLUTION: CAUSE: During long copy runs with STAPLE mode selected, the right side of the stapled sets, USAGE: 20
because it is higher contacts the sensor actuator and the paper exit tray stops lowering at that time.
Even if sets are removed, the tray will not move once detection has occurred. If the unit is allowed
to continue operating, this can result in the stapled edge of sets contacting the foam paper exit
rollers (p/n 122H48251) and damaging them.
SOLUTION: Version 14 of the FS103A EPROM (p/n FS103AA5-14.0) changes the stack height
detection to the front actuator for the Stapled Paper Exit Detector (PS7).
Note: As a work around, until EPROM is installed, set dipswitches 1-5 and 1-6 to a combination
other than 0/0 (factory default) to disable detection of the tray stop signal from the finisher sensor at
the main body. This will allow the tray to continue to lower even if the sensor actuator is contacted
and held.
DESCRIPTION: How to program ATS (auto tray switching), 7060. SOLUTION ID: 50,179
SOLUTION: To program the ATS, perform the following steps: USAGE: 20
1. Access the key operator mode (press and hold the help key while turning the machine ON).
2. Select #9: Memory switches.
3. Select #6: Automatic tray switching.
4. Set the switch for the desired action (ON/OFF).
Note: Endless ATS is not available on this machine. The ability to reload an empty tray and have
the machine select that tray after the current tray is empty while the machine is copying. ATS will
ONLY operate in full auto mode while using the RADF.
DESCRIPTION: When book copy mode is selected, the paper size defaults to 8.5x11R with a message to SOLUTION ID: 50,654
select the proper paper size. Can this be changed to an 8.5x11 default?
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The tray selection preference when APS is canceled must be adjusted. USAGE: 18
SOLUTION: Enter the 25 mode, select item #1 Software Switch Setting. DIPSW 8-4, 8-5, 8-6 will
determine the default tray chosen.
Mode 8-6 8-5 8-4
No preference 0 0 0

16
7060
Tray 1 0 0 1
Tray 2 0 1 0
Tray 3 0 1 1
Tray 4 1 0 0
Tray 5 1 0 1
DESCRIPTION: No feed from any tray, main drive shaft 2 breaking. SOLUTION ID: 59,955
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Stress from driving the LCT paper feed mechanism. USAGE: 18
SOLUTION: The diameter of the main drive shaft 2 was increased in size. To accommodate this,
main drive pulley 1, the developer drive shaft holders (2 bearings), and the frame cutouts where the
bearings are inserted were also modified. In addition, to prevent wearing of main drive pulley 1, pin
A has been repositioned and e-ring has been added.
These parts are not interchangeable. Because of these changes, the new parts cannot be installed
on the old LCT frame, as well a the old parts cannot be installed on the new LCT frame. Since
these parts are not interchangeable, and cannot be mixed, this change applies to machines with
serial numbers 55FE03390 and above. Use the data below to ensure that the appropriate parts are
ordered.
New part numbers for serial number 55FE03390 and above.

Main drive shaft 2 (p/n 55FA18051)
Main drive shaft holder (p/n 55FA75020)
Main support panel (p/n 55FA-1811)
Main support panel B (p/n 55FA18022)
Note: The main support panels may not be needed to repair the older type LCT.
Original part numbers for serial numbers below 55FE03390.

Main drive shaft 2 (p/n 55FA18050)
Main drive shaft holder (p/n 07BA75140)
Main support panel (p/n 55FA-1810)
Main support panel B (p/n 55FA18021)
See [[7060/Force 60 Technical Bulletin #16a| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJC169.bmp SCROLL]] for more
detailed information.
DESCRIPTION: PLEASE WAIT COPIER WARMING UP message that will not clear. SOLUTION ID: 68,641
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The short heater lamp in the upper fusing roller is not ON. This is caused by a poor USAGE: 17
connection between the fuser connector and the main body fuser connector.
SOLUTION: With the fuser installed, reseat each pin on the main body fuser connector . Use a
pointed object such as a meter lead.
DESCRIPTION: F34-1 during warm-up. SOLUTION ID: 82,040

SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed DC power supply. USAGE: 17
SOLUTION: After resetting the failure code, observe the fixing lamps during and after warm-up.
When F34 is indicated, if the fixing lamps remain on, the DC power supply has failed. Replace the
DC power supply (p/n 55FA84510).
DESCRIPTION: J31 paper creasing before second paper feed. SOLUTION ID: 51,053
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Paper feed clutches slipping or not operating properly. USAGE: 17
SOLUTION: Clean or replace if necessary: 2nd paper feed (MC3) (p/n 25SA82010), upper paper
feed (MC5) (p/n 55FA82030), lower paper feed (MC6) (p/n 55FA82030), bypass (MC7) (p/n
25SA82020) and PFU conveyance (MC8) (p/n 55FA82030). Slipping can occur on new machines
and cleaning clutches on set-up may be beneficial. Check the allen screws on the clutches to
ensure they are tightened properly.
DESCRIPTION: Developer spewing. SOLUTION ID: 50,387

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Connector 5 on the main CB is loose. USAGE: 17
SOLUTION: Reseat connector 5.

17
7060
DESCRIPTION: After loading paper in Tray 3, the tray will not raise when the START/PRINT key is pressed. SOLUTION ID: 86,933
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The upper paper enter sheet, which is attached to the bottom of the paper feed oscillate USAGE: 16
plate is deformed and contacting the upper double feed prevention rubber. As a result, the paper
feed oscillate plate is lifted upward when the START/PRINT key is pressed. This action causes the
Tray 3 upper limit detection actuator to flag the LCT upper limit PS (PS143), which stops the tray
from raising.
SOLUTION: To check the position of the upper paper enter sheet, perform the following:
1. Power the copier OFF.
2. Remove the 1000 sheet LCT paper feed/conveyance section.
3. Inspect the bottom of the paper feed oscillate plate (p/n 55FA58110), where the upper paper
enter sheet is attached. The sheet should be parallel to the bottom of the paper feed oscillate plate
and extend 5mm beyond the edge. Ensure that the upper paper entrance sheet is not contacting
the upper double feed prevention roller.
4. If the upper paper enter sheet has become deformed and is contacting the upper double feed
prevention roller; its length can be trimmed as a temporary measure. However, a new upper paper
enter sheet (p/n 25SA58360) should be installed to prevent paper jams, which may occur as a
result of a shortened upper paper enter sheet failing to properly guide the paper to the nip of the
upper and lower double feed prevention rollers.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, poor paper alignment in staple mode. SOLUTION ID: 68,615
Note: The following adjustments are covered in [[FS103/FS103A Technical Bulletin #5| IMAGE
V:\bitmaps\cjc102.bmp SCROLL]].
1. Middle sponge roller is damaged or worn. Inspect the middle sponge roller (p/n 122H45250). If
it is damaged or worn, replace it as needed.
2. Belt tension for stacker entrance motor is incorrect. Check the belt tension of the stacker
entrance motor (M14). The correct tension is 1.0 ñ 0.01kg. If adjustment is required, loosen the
screw on M14 and move it to adjust the tension.
3. Belt tension for connecting belt is incorrect. Adjust the tension of the connecting belt. Loosen
the screw that secures the tension roller for the connecting part belt. Adjust the tension roller
position to balance the tension spring and belt tension. Note that the belt tension is effected by the
tension roller position. Ensure that the roller does not shift when tightening the screws.
4. Belt tension for the paper exit roller motor is incorrect. Adjust the paper exit roller motor (M7)
belt tension. Loosen the four screws that secure M7 and move it to adjust the tension.
5. The belt detection gear is out of adjustment. Ensure that the belt detection gear is adjusted
correctly. See FS103/FS103A Technical Bulletin #5 for proper adjustment.
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, paper jams at the entrance to the FS103B finisher. The finisher is not SOLUTION ID: 60,723
recognized by the main body.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect firmware. A main body EPROM upgrade is necessary. USAGE: 15
SOLUTION: Install the following EPROMs to resolve this problem.

Note: The current main CB EPROMs included in the tandem kit are version 12. You will need to
install tandem version 13 as listed below:
Latest EPROMs for the main CB:

C1, IC22 (p/n 7060T122-13.0)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060T123-13.0)
Latest EPROMs for the operation panel:

O1, IC16 (p/n 7060216-14.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060217-13.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060212-13.0)
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060218-14.0)
Latest EPROMs for the image processing board:

I1, IC29 (p/n 7060B29-17.0)
I2, IC30 (p/n 7060B30-17.0)
In addition, the latest EPROM versions for the 7060 operation board function correctly with the new
main CB tandem EPROMs (version 13). Special tandem EPROMs for the operation panel are
NOT required.
DESCRIPTION: How to add toner, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 56,711

18
7060
SOLUTION: To add toner, perform the following steps: USAGE: 15

1. Remove the flexible outer cap on the cartridge, if present.
2. Shake the cartridge several times to loosen the toner.
3. Open the copier front door and pull the toner hopper 90 degrees to the right.
4. Invert the toner cartridge over the hopper with the arrow pointing toward you.
5. Insert the front, then rear of the cartridge, until it fully seats onto the hopper.
6. Slide the lever and tap the toner cartridge several times.
7. Slide the lever back and remove the empty cartridge. Return the toner hopper to the original
position and close the copier door.
DESCRIPTION: J11, J12, J13, or J14 when trying to feed from any paper tray. SOLUTION ID: 69,961
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Paper feed motor (M140) has failed. Verify the operation of M140 using the 47 USAGE: 14
multimode, output code 021, press P-03-P.
SOLUTION: Replace M140 (p/n 55FA-1820).
Notes:
1. Inspect complete paper feed drive system for any binding and repair as necessary.
2. The 7060 service manual (12/98) and parts catalog (1/98) refers to M140 as a LCT paper feed
motor. This is incorrect. M140 provides drive to all paper feed trays.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, E67-0 at power up. SOLUTION ID: 65,700

SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed original push pressure motor (M304) which is located on the document feeder. USAGE: 14
M304 must initialize at power up and cycle the original pressure plate.
SOLUTION: Ensure that there isn't any mechanical binds with the original pressure plate
mechanism. Replace M304 (p/n 12GQ-4171) as needed.
DESCRIPTION: APS is not working properly. SOLUTION ID: 50,682

1. If APS is not selecting the paper in the universal tray, APS/ATS for tray 1 is turned OFF.
APS/ATS can be turned ON/OFF by changing the setting of memory switch 9. To access the
ATS/APS setting, perform the following:
a. Turn the machine ON while holding the (Help) button down,
b. Select 9 memory switch
c. Use the up arrow to select memory switch 9.
d. The function can now be turned ON/OFF.
2. APS not selecting the bypass tray. APS cannot select the bypass tray. Customer must
manually select bypass tray using the (Copy Size) button on the LCD board.
3. Cannot select APS off the glass. The key operator mode settings in memory switches 7, Platen
APS and 14, Platen AMS are set incorrectly. Turn memory switches 7 and 14 ON or OFF to
accommodate the customers request.
4. APS not working off platen glass. Selecting the wrong size paper. The screw that holds APS
sensor 4 (outside) (PS43) in place has backed out so that proper size detection does not take
place. Tighten screw and ensure PS43 is correctly positioned. Check APS operation.
DESCRIPTION: Power requirements, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 50,294

SOLUTION: Voltage: 115V AC ñ 10% (dedicated line recommended) USAGE: 14
Current: 20A AC
Frequency: 60Hz ñ 2.5Hz
Grounding: Isolation recommended
Note: A dedicated AC line with an isolated ground is strongly recommended. A dedicated line
mandates the exclusive use of an electrical branch circuit where the receptacle grounding terminal
is grounded by an insulated grounding conductor that is isolated from the receptacle mounting
hardware (per National Electrical code, article 250-74 exception no. 4).
Termination:
NEMA Type 5-20R receptacle (125V AC, 2-pole, 3-wire, grounded).
[[Technical Operations Bulletin A12/D11.| IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\JRC089.BMP SCROLL]] outlines

site requirements for 20A machines.
DESCRIPTION: J17-3 when duplexing out of Tray 4 only. SOLUTION ID: 87,635

19
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The one-way bearing within the two 1st feed rollers are slipping causing inconsistent 1st USAGE: 13
paper feed out of the tray
SOLUTION: Replace the following 1st paper feed components:

1. 1st feed roller (A) assembly (p/n 55FA-4110) (Includes bearing and rubber).
2. 1st feed roller (B) bearing (p/n 25AA40100).
3. 1st feed roller (B) rubber (p/n 25SA40960).
4. 1st feed roller (A) shaft (p/n 55FA58210).
5. 1st feed roller (B) shaft (p/n 55FA-0630).
Note: Refer to 7060 parts catalog (1/98) page 92 and 93 for reference.
DESCRIPTION: J30 or J31. SOLUTION ID: 84,202

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The spring on the actuator to PS14 is loose. USAGE: 13
SOLUTION: Tighten or replace the spring (p/n 540041103).
DESCRIPTION: When configured as a printer, after a copy job has completed, a waiting print job SOLUTION ID: 81,702
immediately prints. With a copy/print tracking device connected to the printer, the copy and
print jobs are counted as one, rather than two separate jobs. How can a copier timeout be
set to delay the time between a copy job and a print job waiting in queue?
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A configuration change and EPROM update are required. USAGE: 13
SOLUTION: In the CONFIGURATION setting screen for the printer mode there is a selection,
COPY TIMEOUT, which allows programming of the time (15, 30, 60, or 90 seconds) that the
machine remains in the copier mode before switching to the printer mode. For this programming to
work, special ROM version 21.3 must be installed.
Notes:
1. [[Latest EPROM level| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and [[Internal Link
for Faxing/Printing current 7060 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
2. See [[7060 EPROM Release Notification version 21.3| URL
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060-21D.pdf]]. To view this PDF, Acrobat* Reader must
be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent black blurry line running front-to-rear. SOLUTION ID: 77,575
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The charging corona unit end blocks, or main charge corona wire have failed. USAGE: 13
SOLUTION: To check the charge corona unit, perform the following:

2. Extract the drum unit from the copier and remove the charging corona unit.
3. Visually inspect the front end block, rear end block, and main charge corona wire for any signs
of arcing, or discoloration.
4. Replace the main charge corona wire (p/n 55FA25011), or the entire charging corona unit (p/n
55FA-2500) as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: J30-1 only from Tray 1. SOLUTION ID: 87,149

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Insufficient feed from the 2 upper intermediate conveyance rollers in the PFU. USAGE: 13
SOLUTION: Any or all of the following feed components may be worn:

PART NUMBER ITEM
25SA-4851 The 4 (2 on each shaft) intermediate conveyance feed rollers
55FA82040 MC9 intermediate conveyance clutch
25SA77260 PF regulation one-way gear
25AA44160 The 4 (2 on each shaft) white conveyance rollers mounted to the PFU door
25SA40900 PFU door conveyance roller (upper) pressure spring
25SA40910 PFU door conveyance roller (middle) pressure spring
Notes:
1. The jamming problem may only occur with longer paper such as 8.5x14 or 11x17.
2. Paper may not jam if pressure is applied to the PFU door while copying.
3. Refer to the 7060 Parts Catalog (1/98) pages 48 and 49 for reference.

20
7060
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent E46-12; erratic copy images. SOLUTION ID: 50,528

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Image data interrupted prior to full compression. This can be attributed to a problem with USAGE: 13
the Image Processing, E-RDH board (p/n 55FA-9620), or Main CB (P/N 55FA-9010).
SOLUTION: Reseat connections, EPROMs, or SIMMs. If problem persists, identify the failed
board and replace.
DESCRIPTION: Key counter information. SOLUTION ID: 50,250

SOLUTION: 1. How to install Konica type key counter: USAGE: 13
a. Main body brown wire to key counter black wire.
b. Main body blue wire to key counter red wire.
c. Main body red wire to key counter green wire.
d. Main body orange wire to key counter white wire.
2. How to install a Hecon* counter

7050 Hecon Pin
________________________________
Brown to Black to 1
Blue to Red to 3
Red to Green to 4
Orange to White to 6
Questions
3. Can a key counter stop copying immediately when removed?
Yes. The reaction to the removal of the key counter during copy cycle can be programmed by
setting 25 mode software dip switches, dip switch #0 set to:
0 Copier Stops with last copy exit
1 Copier Stops immediately
DESCRIPTION: F36-1 shortly after power up. SOLUTION ID: 98,482

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The lower thermostat (TS2), or upper thermostat (TS1) is open, resulting in an USAGE: 12
interruption of the 120V AC power source to fixing lamps L2, L3, and L4.
SOLUTION: To check the state of the lower thermostat (TS2) and the upper thermostat (TS1),
perform the following:
2. Access the 47 mode (power the copier ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys).
3. Using a voltmeter (200V AC range), check the voltage at CN392-7 and CN392-8 to frame
ground. A reading of 120V AC should be observed.
4. Measure the voltage at CN392-14, CN392-15, and CN392-16 to frame ground. A reading of
120V AC should be observed. If 0V AC is measured, either the lower thermostat (TS2), or the
upper thermostat (TS1) is open.
5. Remove the fusing unit from the copier, isolate each thermostat from the circuit and perform a
continuity check. Any thermostat, which displays a lack of continuity is open. Replace the lower
thermostat (p/n 25BA88470) or upper thermostat (p/n 25SA88420) as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: New style LCT main drive shaft diameter is larger than the Aux agitator gear, and cannot be SOLUTION ID: 95,800
installed.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The diameter of the new drive shaft (p/n 55FA18052) is larger than the previous versions USAGE: 12
(p/n 55FA18050 & 55FA18051), which are no longer available.
SOLUTION: In order to provide increased durability, beginning with serial number 55FE03390, the
diameter of the main drive shaft 2 was increased in size. As a result of this change, modifications
were also made to the AUX agitator gear (main body driving gear), main drive shaft holders (2
bearings), and the frame cutouts where the bearings are inserted. In addition, to prevent wearing
of main drive pulley 1, pin A has been repositioned and an e-ring has been added. These parts are
not interchangeable with early production machines. Therefore, the new parts cannot be installed
on the old style LCT frame and the old parts cannot be installed on the new LCT frame. Since only
the new style main drive shaft 2 is available, installation of upgrade kit (SE95-3541) will be required
when replacing a main drive shaft 2 in a machine below serial number 55FE03390. The kit
contains the following parts:
QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

1 Main drive shaft 2 (p/n 55FA18052)
1 AUX agitator gear (main body driving gear) (p/n 55FA77190)

21
7060
2 Main drive shaft holder (p/n 55FA75020)

1 Main support panel (p/n 55FA-1811)
1 Main support panel B (p/n 55FA18022)
In addition an E-ring (p/n 00Z670606) will be required to secure main drive pulley 1 to main drive
shaft 2.
Note: If the machine is above serial number 55FE03390 all the parts contained in the upgrade kit
will have been installed in the machine during manufacturing. Therefore, when replacing main
drive shaft 2 in a machine above serial number 55FE03390 or a machine which has had the
(SE95-35410) upgrade kit previously installed, the (SE95-3610) upgrade kit should be ordered.
The kit contains the following parts:
QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

1 Main drive shaft 2 (p/n 55FA18052)
1 AUX agitator gear (main body driving gear) (p/n 55FA77190)
DESCRIPTION: DF310, APS selects 5.5x8.5 with an 8.5x11 original. SOLUTION ID: 62,406
CAUSE: PS304 (No original PS) is not being flagged by it's actuator. The rear 3 paper feed AUX
belts (p/n 12QV40670) have fallen off the paper feed drive shaft (p/n 12VR40440) and are
interfering with the movement of the PS304 actuator.
SOLUTION: Reinstall the paper feed AUX belts and ensure that PS304 actuator moves freely.
Note: The symptom may only occur with one 8.5x11 original. This is due to the fact that, 2 or more
originals may create enough pressure to push the actuator up into PS304.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, unable to access the Input List checks using the 47 mode, input code 76. SOLUTION ID: 53,547
SOLUTION: CAUSE: If the exit tray is actuating the upper limit sensor the 47 mode, input code 76, test USAGE: 12
functions will not work.
SOLUTION: Enter the 47 mode, output code 75, P-23-P and press the Start Print button. This will
move the exit tray down, deactivating PS2 and allow the 47 Mode, input code 76, test functions to
operate. The state of PS2 can be verified at CN4-2 on the finisher CB to ground, 0V DC would
indicate it is not actuated, and the 47 mode, input code 76, test functions should work. 5V DC
would indicate it is actuated, and the 47 mode, input code 76, test functions will be locked out.
Note: There are several discrepancies in the list of the 47 mode, input code 76, function contained
in the 7060 service manual. An updated list of the test functions follows.
MULTI
MODE ITEM FUNCTION / DESCRIPTION
01 PS2 Tray Upper Limit sensor
02 PS3 Tray Lower Limit sensor
03 PS4 Finisher Entrance Passage sensor
04 PS5 Stacker Conveyance Passage sensor
05 PS6 Paper Exit sensor #1
06 PS7 Staple Paper Exit Upper Limit sensor
07 PS8 Alignment Plate Home Position sensor
08 PS9 Paper Exit Belt Home Position sensor
10 PS11 Stapler Movement Home Position sensor
11 PS12 Paper Exit Opening sensor
-- PS14 Rear Stapler Empty sensor (must be checked at CN6-A10 of the finisher CB, to
ground)
-- PS15 Rear Stapler Home Position sensor (must be checked at CN6-A11 of the finisher
CB, to ground)
-- PS16 Front Stapler Empty sensor (must be checked at CN6-B1 of the finisher CB, to
ground)
-- PS17 Front Stapler Home Position sensor (must be checked at CN6-B2 of the finisher
CB, to ground)
17 PS18 Roller Shift Home Position sensor
19 PS20 Stacker Empty sensor
20 PS21 Stapler Rotation (Vertical) Detection sensor
21 PS22 Stapler Rotation (Slanting) Detection sensor
22 MS1 Finisher Door Interlock
-- PS23 Paper Exit sensor #2 (must be checked at CN 11-2 on the finisher CB, to ground)
DESCRIPTION: Excessive trail edge deletion. SOLUTION ID: 71,246

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The lead edge timing adjustment (registration) in the 36 mode is set so there is no USAGE: 11
deletion on the lead edge of the copy. This causes an excessive trail edge deletion on the copy.

22
7060
SOLUTION: Since full edge to edge copying is not possible, the lead edge timing must be set so
there is an equal amount of deletion on the lead edge and trail edge of the copy. To perform the
lead edge adjustment for all copies NOT utilizing the VERY HIGH mode (E-RDH memory), perform
the following:
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. From the adjustment mode screen, select 2 for timing adjustment.
3. From the timing adjustment mode screen, select 2 for restart timing adjustment.
4. Press the next adjustment button to scroll to (printer: collective). This adjustment will adjust all
trays to the same value. Pressing the next adjustment button will allow individual adjustment of
each tray, or SIDE TWO. After using the printer collective mode and the machine is powered
OFF/ON the data will read 0. The setting has been stored and can be viewed in the individual
settings.
5. Press the copy screen button on the touch screen.
6. Press the start print button, the machine will exit a self-generated 11x17 test chart. Visually
check the lead edge timing.
7. If the lead edge timing is not within standard, press the C button while holding down the P
8. Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the touch screen, then press the set key. Input range
-99 to 99.
Note: One step is equal to 0.1 mm. Press the copy screen button and make a copy.
9. Repeat the above steps until the standard is achieved.
Standard:
DESCRIPTION: No power SOLUTION ID: 83,677

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The DCPS has entered self protect mode, which locks out operational voltage outputs. USAGE: 11
SOLUTION: To initialize the DCPS, perform the following:

2. Remove the machine power cord from the wall outlet. Allow the copier to sit idle for seven (7)
minutes.
3. Plug the machine into the wall outlet and power the copier ON.
DESCRIPTION: Gray background. SOLUTION ID: 64,057

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Toner is added to the machine prior to performing the L-detect adjustment. USAGE: 11
SOLUTION: Excessive toner mixes with the developer, preventing a true reading (density level
exceeds the density detection range). Or this area is not cleaned prior to doing the L-detect
adjustment. Clean the sensor area carefully and repeat L-detect adjustment. This information is
found in 7060/FORCE 60/7150 [[Technical Bulletin #2B| IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\CJC101.bmp
SCROLL]].
As an interim solution, perform the following:
a. Add toner prior to performing the L-detect adjustment, but leave the toner hopper swung
away from the machine.
b. Using the door switch jig (p/n 00M6-2-00), adjust the L-detection.
c. Set the toner supply unit once the L-detect adjustment is completed. The time it takes to
perform the L-detect allows toner in the hopper to settle, preventing an excessive amount of toner
from dumping into the developer.
DESCRIPTION: Universal tray detecting A4 paper. SOLUTION ID: 61,257

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect destination switchover software setting. USAGE: 11
SOLUTION: Perform the following:

1. Access the 25 mode (turn the machine ON while holding down the 2 and 5 keys).
2. Select #1: Software switch setting.
3. Select software dipswitch #4 using the left up/down arrow.
4. Select bit number 2 using the middle up arrow.
5. Select ON (=1).
6. Select bit number 3 using the middle up arrow.
7. Select OFF (=0).
8. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN to end setting.
DESCRIPTION: Recommended transparency, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 54,418

23
7060
SOLUTION: No specification is available. Engineering has tested and approved Folex* Type X-500 (w/o stripe), USAGE: 11
3M* PP2500 and CG5000 transparencies for use in the 7060. Konica (PCUA 946427) is
equivalent to the 3M type PP2500 (688/503).
Note: Konica recommends feeding transparencies through the bypass tray to reduce the
occurrence of misfeeding. If a sorter is used, see [[Technical Operations Bulletin #A13 & D12|
IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\JRC043.BMP SCROLL]] for other available types of transparencies.
DESCRIPTION: How to recover an original corona current value when altered in the 36 mode. SOLUTION ID: 53,619
SOLUTION: Note: There are no corona current specifications for this model. USAGE: 11
Utilize the following values for corona current settings (these are only recommendations and each
machine may require further adjustments):
1. Charge - 135
2. Transfer - 82
3. Separation AC - 88
4. Separation DC - 93
5. Charging grid voltage - 140
6. Bias of development - 175
7. Transfer (600dpi) - 82
8. Separation AC (600dpi) - 88
9. Separation DC (600dpi) - 93
Note: Charging grid voltage is adjustable with a meter to the value listed on the drum flange.
Please refer to page 6-27 of the 7060 service manual (12/98).
DESCRIPTION: Can the DF310 sense A4 size paper? SOLUTION ID: 53,493
The DF310 is able to sense and select A4 paper, which is loaded in the landscape direction. The
paper in the machine must also be loaded in the landscape direction.
DESCRIPTION: Document feeder jams with last original remaining in tray. Message reads CHECK RELOAD SOLUTION ID: 51,579
ORIGINALS IN ORDER AND FACE DOWN AND PRESS START PRINT.
SOLUTION: [[Important note concerning changes to the DF310.| FILE V:\text\df310.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] USAGE: 11
Note: Perform the following as preliminary checks:

a. Clean platen glass with approved glass cleaner.
b. Check document feeder position using document feeder positioning block (p/n 12ER12073).
Refer to DF310 service manual page 5 and 6 (9/97).
c. Check document feeder height, using document feeder spacer (p/n 12ER12110). Refer to
DF310 service manual page 6 and 7 (9/97).
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The feed roller for the original has been installed backwards.
Remove and correctly install a feed roller (p/n 12VR40100) correctly. The white dot should be on
the same side as the coupling (p/n 12VR40460).
2. As an interim solution, replace the double feed prevention spring.

Replace the silver colored spring with (p/n 12ER40473) which is blue in color.
3. The lift pressure plate has too much tension (upward force).
Adjust the pressure plate by loosening mounting screw and varying spring tension with the
adjustment screw (one or both are a paint locked screw). With the plate in the up position, using a
gram gauge pull the plate down. It should break away from the feed tire at 150 to 175 grams.
4. The distance between the Original Transmission photo sensor (PS302) and the Original Feed
photo sensor (PS305) is too large (timing error).
Measure the distance between the front edge of PS302 and the rear edge of PS305. Distance
should be 12 mm plus or minus 1 mm. If distance needs to be decreased, as an interim solution,
insert a washer beneath PS305 mounting bracket.
5. Verify the following DF310 photosensors on the RADF CB:

PS CN 5V DC CN Signal Name
310 104-A1 102-1 Original detection
302 104-A2 102-2 Original transmission
304 104-A4 102-4 No original

24
7060
305 104-A5 102-5 Original paper feed

309 104-A9 102-9 Up/Down pressure plate
310 104-A10 102-10 5.5x8.5 detection
DESCRIPTION: Does the 7060 use A3 paper? SOLUTION ID: 50,902

SOLUTION: The 7060 can run A3 size paper, providing the EPROMs are level 11.0 or higher. Note: A3 size USAGE: 11
paper can only be placed in tray 2. The universal tray cannot be used. To set the A3 size, perform
the following:
2. Select 2 Paper size setting.
3. Select Tray 2 and scroll through the different paper sizes to A3
5. Enter Key Operator Mode (Hold Help while powering ON)
6. Select 9 Memory switch
7. Scroll to No. 4: Erasure outside original
8. Select Change Setting Contents until Erased APS/AMS only
Note: If this is not set A3 originals are detected as 11x17. APS is not available for A3.
9. Adjust the guides on Tray 2 to fit A3 paper.
DESCRIPTION: How to clear fuser abnormality codes (F34, F35, F36), 7060. SOLUTION ID: 50,877
SOLUTION: Perform the following: USAGE: 11
1. Access the 25 mode (turn the machine ON while holding down the 2 and 5 keys).
4. Select the bit number of the switch (1=F34 latch, 2=F35 latch, 3=F36 latch, 4=F37 latch) using
the middle up arrow.
5. Select ON (=1) or OFF (=0) of the switch.
DESCRIPTION: The 32MB memory module does not work immediately after installation. SOLUTION ID: 49,975
1. If new 32MB Memory Modules or SIMM, PCUA# 950-781 (MU-103) appears to fit properly in the
socket but is not recognized, the memory is incorrect from the vendor.
The vendor substitued EDO memory which is not compatible with the 7060. To verify;
a. Install the memory module
b. Access diagnostic mode - Hold down (4) (7) while turning the main switch ON
c. Select output mode 197 and press (Start Print)
d. The display will read output NOW for a few seconds and eventually change to a number
corresponding to the total memory recognized.
If the memory is not recognized, return the module under the warranty return program. All Windsor
and Compton stock has been reworked, however some incorrect modules still remain in the
outlying warehouses.
Note: If a monitor is connected to the IP, memory type (EDO) will be displayed briefly under the
category of EDO DRAMs at bank. The correct SIMM should display as none.
2. The original shipment (September 97) of 32MB Memory Modules or SIMM, PCUA# 950-781 will
not fit properly in the socket. The position of the IC is too close to the edge of the module. This
causes the IC to contact the socket when the module is angled to lock into place. Forcing the
module into place will result in damage.
Return modules for correct ones. An RMA is required The procedure to replace the unit is as
follows:
a. Determine if the caller is branch or dealer
b. If the caller is a dealer, refer them to dealer operations, extension 2552. Dealer operations
will issue and new order and an RMA.
If caller is branch, ask them to have their order number and refer them to supplies order
entry. They will enter another order and issue a RMA.
Log the call for tracking purposes
DESCRIPTION: DF310, part numbers for paper supply rubber (A), paper supply rubber (B), and the double SOLUTION ID: 86,691
feed prevention roller for a Type 2 feed unit, which has two feed tires.
SOLUTION: Modifications to the paper feed mechanism have resulted in two completely different part sets with USAGE: 10
no interchangeability. For this reason, prior to ordering replacement parts, you must determine
whether you have a Type 1 feed unit, or a Type 2 feed unit. The type of feed unit can be
determined by the following:
25
7060
Type 1 (one feed tire is used)

7060 S/N 55FE02088 and below
7150 S/N 55NE00837 and below
Type 2 (two feed tires are used)

7060 S/N 55FE02089 and above
7150 S/N 55NE00838 and above
Paper supply rubber (A)

Type 1: p/n 12VR40340, Qty. (1)
Type 2: p/n 12QV40180, Qty. (2)
Paper supply rubber (B)

Type 1: p/n 12VR40100, Qty. (1)
Type 2: p/n 12QV40340, Qty. (1)
Double feed prevention roller

Type 1: p/n 12VR40310, Qty. (1)
Type 2: p/n 12VR40311, Qty. (1)
DESCRIPTION: J21 code while copying. SOLUTION ID: 77,692

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Some new drums (PCUA 950786) or fatigued drums may generate J21 codes. USAGE: 10
SOLUTION: Be sure to reset the drum counter and perform the DMAX/GAMMA level adjustment
upon drum replacement. If the J21 code persists, install another new drum. Return the failed drum
for warranty credit. When the drum is verified as exhibiting this failure, credit will be issued.
[[Link for internal use only.| RUN C:\Acrobat3\Reader\AcroRd32.exe V:\PDFFILES\j21.pdf]]
Notes:
1. Drum counter reset procedure.
a. Access the 47 mode (power ON the copier while holding down the 4 and 7 keys), enter output
code 91, press Start\Print.
b. To verify drum counter reset, power copier OFF/ON, press P then the 3 key to display the
current drum count (should be 0).
2. DMAX/GAMMA level adjustment procedure.
a. Access the 47 mode (power ON the copier while holding down the 4 and 7 keys), enter output
code 018, press Start\Print.
b. The display will indicate OUT:NOW for approximately 45 seconds during the adjustment
procedure, the display will then indicate OUT:FIN when the adjustment is complete.
3. If you have equipment experiencing these symptoms, please submit a new problem through
expert web including serial number and meter reading. These submissions will allow proper
tracking of field impact.
DESCRIPTION: LT351, paper specifications. SOLUTION ID: 66,391

SOLUTION: LT351 paper specifications are as follows: USAGE: 10
Paper size: 8.5x11.
Type of paper: High quality 16lb to 24lb.
Maximum capacity: 3,640 sheets (16lb).
DESCRIPTION: The second side image is shifted (misaligned) front to rear about 1.5 inches, only when SOLUTION ID: 60,460
using booklet mode, 8.5x11 paper only.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Image shift is not selected. USAGE: 10
SOLUTION: After selecting the booklet mode, select image shift. Start at 10mm shift and adjust
as necessary to achieve best results.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, the exit tray will not raise. SOLUTION ID: 55,991
1. The actuator for the paper exit 1 detection sensor (PS6) is hung up, not allowing the up/down
tray to return to the home position.
Verify the operation of PS6, ensuring that the actuator moves freely. If necessary, replace the
sensor assembly (p/n 12QR-4071) sensor only (p/n 552085510).
2. Tray upper limit detection sensor (PS2) is actuated. The curved actuator that is position below
the exit rollers is dislodged and actuating PS2.
Reposition PS2 actuator for proper movement. Perform the following to test PS2 in diagnostics:
26
7060
a. Access the 47 mode (hold down 4 and 7 at power ON), input code 76, press P-01-P.
b. The LCD should indicate a LO when PS2 is not actuated and a HI when actuated.
Note: The exit tray must be lowered below PS7 prior to checking any input sensor/switch.
DESCRIPTION: How to print ECM data. SOLUTION ID: 54,350

SOLUTION: To print ECM data, perform the following: USAGE: 10
1. Enter a 5 digit passcode.
2. Press the P key.
3. Press the 9 key.
4. Press the start / print key.
5. Enter the 8 digit ECM master code.
6. Press the start / print key, and ensure that the LCD screen reads: Data printing mode 1 (1 - 3),
Please switch OFF after printing.
7. Enter the corresponding number for the printed data desired.
a. For copy quantity for each password, press the 1 key.
b. For copy limit for each password, press the 2 key.
c. For copy quantity for each paper size, press the 3 key.
8. Press the start / print key.
9. After the data has been printed, turn the copier OFF then ON to exit the data printing mode.
DESCRIPTION: Machine intermittently goes dead during long copy runs. SOLUTION ID: 53,356
SOLUTION: CAUSE: To protect the DC power supply during long copy run, the DC power supply will shut off if USAGE: 10
the temperature rises to a certain point.
SOLUTION: If this shut off occurs, unplug the machine for about one minute and then plug it back
in. To reduce the possibility of this occurring, the rating of TR15, TR19, and R179 has been
changed. The modified DC power supply is designated by part number 55FA84512.
Notes:
1. Boards experiencing this problem with part numbers 55FA84510 and 55FA84511 will be
replaced with a reduced cost board. The part number is printed on a white label that is located on
the end of the DCPS metal frame.
2. Boards with part numbers 55FA84512 and above will be processed as normal failures and will
not be replaced with the reduced cost board.
3. In the event of DCPS failure, the paper feed mechanisms for Tray 3 and Tray 4 should be
thoroughly checked with special attention to paid to the Tray Motors (M17/M18). Motor binding
can induce overcurrent and result in failure of board components. Failure to correct the binding will
result in repeated DCPS failures on the engine regardless of the board type in use.
4. Installed units should be checked to ensure that proper airflow is provided by correctly
positioning the engine away from walls or surrounding obstructions.
5. No board repair of any kind should be attempted in the field due to safety concerns.
DESCRIPTION: Copier goes to a warm-up condition (fuser rollers turning with PLEASE WAIT COPIER SOLUTION ID: 50,879
WARMING UP message) when copying a large job. After a short time span, the job will
continue.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Fusing temperature drops below 392 degrees F due to the copy paper absorbing the heat USAGE: 10
on a long run.
SOLUTION: The copier is designed to operate this way, preventing insufficient fusing of toner.
DESCRIPTION: The copy paper is being Z-folded at the registration rollers. SOLUTION ID: 89,925
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Excessive paper loop is being generated due to a binding upper paper feed (conveyance) USAGE: 9
clutch (p/n 55FA82040).
SOLUTION: Replace the upper conveyance clutch.

Note: As a troubleshooting measure, the clutch may be exchanged with the lower conveyance
clutch which is the same part number.
DESCRIPTION: Light trail edge only on the second side. SOLUTION ID: 81,935
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The DC separation current is too high for the paper and environmental conditions, which USAGE: 9
is resulting in a residual charge remaining on the paper after the first side has been copied and
transferred.
SOLUTION: To change the DC separation current, perform the following:

3. Touch [1. High voltage auto adjust] on the touchscreen.

27
7060
4. Touch [Next adjustment], which is located on the lower left corner of the touchscreen 3 times.
5. [HV adjustment (separation DC)] will be displayed in the dark blue band at the top of the
touchscreen, along with the current setting (usually in the vicinity of 94).
6. Reduce the current value by 10 and enter it as the new setting. Press the [SET] key on the
touchscreen.
7. Power the copier OFF/ON to exit the 36 mode and check the copy quality.
8. Repeat steps (1) through (7) until the 2nd side trail edge is properly transferred.
9. Repeat steps (1) through (3).
10. Touch [Next adjustment], which is located on the lower left corner of the touchscreen 8 times.
11. [HV adjustment (separation DC) 600dpi] will be displayed in the dark blue band at the top of
the touchscreen, along with the current setting.
12. Set the (separation DC 600dpi) value the same as the final value entered for (separation DC)
at the completion of step (8).
Notes:
1. This adjustment is only recommended for use in specific instances, where the environmental
conditions are adversely affecting image transfer. In no case should the (separation DC) or
(separation DC 600dpi) setting be set below 40.
2. View the [[copy quality example for a comparison of a normal trail edge and a light trail edge|
IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc215.bmp SCROLL]].
DESCRIPTION: Intermittently, E18-4 is displayed when using Tray 4. SOLUTION ID: 70,267
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The LCT front and rear guide plates (p/n 25SA57590) are positioned too close to the USAGE: 9
paper, which is restricting the paper lifting motion.
SOLUTION: To properly position the front and rear guide plates, perform the following:
1. Set the rear paper guide plate at the position of the paper size to be used, and fix it with two
screws.
2. Set the rear reinforcing plate at the position of the paper size to be used, and fix it with one
screw.
3. Set the front guide plate at the position of the paper size to be used and fix it temporarily with
two screws.
4. Load a sheet of proper size paper into the tray, position it against the rear paper guide plate.
Fix the front guide plate allowing a spacing of 1 to 1.5mm between the front guide plate and the
paper.
5. Set the front reinforcing plate at the position of the paper size to be used and fix it temporarily
with one screw.
6. Manually raise the tray up/down plate and ensure that the same 1 to 1.5mm spacing is present
between the front guide plate and the paper. If the spacing is not proper, reposition the front
reinforcing plate, until the proper spacing is achieved.
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent paper skew, J19 or J30 from any tray. SOLUTION ID: 63,958
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Bent or deformed mylars on the lower paper feed resist plate in the 2nd paper feed unit. USAGE: 9
SOLUTION: Replace the front (p/n 25SA41231) and rear (p/n 25SA41241) paper regulation sheets
(mylars) on the lower paper feed resist plate (p/n 25SA41031).
Note: This may be caused by customers rotating the second paper feed roller in the wrong
direction during jam removal. Be sure to reinforce the proper procedure with customers as
necessary.
DESCRIPTION: How to configure the 7060 as a page printer. SOLUTION ID: 60,567
SOLUTION: The 7060 is a page printer only with the finisher model FS103B (PCUA 950805) installed. The USAGE: 9
FS103B is a face up/face down finisher which provides capabilities to page print in simplex
(1-sided) mode with no stapling. The latest level main body firmware must be installed, as well the
IP302 controller needs to be updated to IP system software version 3.0.4 (or later). The latest
version system software is available on the Konica [[FTP site| FILE V:\text\CBC009.txt NEW
NoWordWrap]]. Refer to the [[FTP_ user site.txt file| FILE V:\text\CBC010.txt NEW NoWordWrap]]
on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing
FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for
Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
DESCRIPTION: After EPROMs were replaced E47-1 occurs shortly after power up. SOLUTION ID: 55,156
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Defective or improperly installed image processing board EPROMs. USAGE: 9
SOLUTION: Confirm that the EPROMs are the correct level and installed correctly. Replace the
EPROMs if necessary.
DESCRIPTION: ADU exit jams and skewed copies. SOLUTION ID: 53,923

28
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Uneven tension on the regulation belts of the decurler mechanism (ADU exit conveyance) USAGE: 9
causes the paper to jam or skew when exiting the ADU.
SOLUTION: Adjust the front and/or rear belt tension plates (p/n 55FA51580 and 55FA51590) and
springs (p/n 55FA51600) so that even tension exists on all belts and no skew occurs.
DESCRIPTION: Machine goes into an excessive COPIER WARMING UP mode at power up. SOLUTION ID: 53,756
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The fuser pressure lever is not fully locked into position. USAGE: 9
SOLUTION: Move the fuser pressure handle to the locked position to the right.
DESCRIPTION: Can the 7060 print from a DOS application? SOLUTION ID: 53,744
SOLUTION: Konica printers using the IP controllers are designed for Windows* based applications. DOS USAGE: 9
applications cannot take advantage of the advanced features of the Konica printer. Some DOS
applications do not have the ability to select a relatively compatible HP printer. The KNAS
response clearly states that DOS applications are not supported by the printer in question.
Likewise, Level Two support via application testing is not available for DOS-based applications.
For non-core platform applications, DOS, Vertical, HOST, etc., enhanced application support will
be made available at the cost of $105.00 per hour. An estimate would be provided as to the time
involved for testing and feedback on the results.
DOS applications are not technically supported since each DOS application carries its own set of
printer drivers instead of a single driver that the Windows operating systems use. Therefore,
printing in DOS is a case-by-case basis. However, some printing functionality can be obtained
using the following recommendations:
1. The application has a driver for a nearly compatible printer such as the HP* 5SiMX.
2. The user doesn't select any special function for the HP printer.
3. The user doesn't expect to use special modes such as staple, booklet, letterhead, etc.
For developers or users that would like to create their own drivers or manually insert printer
commands, see the [[Konica Printer Commands hyperlink| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc146.bmp
SCROLL]] for common PCL* and PJL codes and the [[Top Ten Most Commonly Requested PCL
Commands| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc176.bmp SCROLL]] list.
DESCRIPTION: How to program the default operation panel touchscreen. SOLUTION ID: 53,538
SOLUTION: To program the default operation panel touchscreen, perform the following: USAGE: 9
2. Select option 1 (Software switch setting).
3. Scroll to dipswitch 11-5. Select On/Off to program the desired default operation screen;
Off = The original layered operation default screen is selected
On = The new direct selection operation default screen is selected.
4. Turn power OFF, then back ON.
DESCRIPTION: Scanning mixed originals does not print the first set until all pages are in memory. SOLUTION ID: 53,506
SOLUTION: This is normal machine operation. USAGE: 9
DESCRIPTION: Grid voltage is adjustable, however it cannot be adjusted to the specifications on the drum SOLUTION ID: 53,232
flange.
SOLUTION: The following items should be checked if unable to adjust grid voltage to the value specified on the USAGE: 9
drum flange:
1. Charge Corona Assembly.
2. Contact between the Charge Corona and its input power contact.
3. High Voltage Power Supply.
4. Main CB.
DESCRIPTION: Resets to ENTER PASSWORD too quickly when using ECM. Does not allow enough time for SOLUTION ID: 53,175
the same operator to enter another job.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Auto reset timer is set to a low number such as 30 seconds. USAGE: 9
SOLUTION: Adjust the auto reset timer to a longer time period.

To adjust reset timer, perform the following:
1. Enter HELP Mode
2. Select Memory Switch.

29
7060
3. The first option displayed will be AUTO RESET TIMER

4. Use Change Setting Contents button and adjust reset timer. Each time the Change Settiing
Contents button is touched, the time is incremented upwards. Continuing to touch the Change
Settiing Contents will bring the setting back to OFF and then 30 seconds etc.
DESCRIPTION: How to perform an L-detect adjustment. SOLUTION ID: 53,056

SOLUTION: To perform L-Detect adjustment, perform the following: USAGE: 9
1. Turn the main switch ON, while holding down [4] and [7].
2. Enter [0], [9], [5], and [START].
3. This procedure will run for about five minutes.
See page 6-53 in the 7060 Service Manual.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, how to staple mixed originals. SOLUTION ID: 51,839

SOLUTION: The model 7060 cannot staple when the mixed original mode is programmed. Due to different USAGE: 9
widths of paper, it is not possible to staple in the required corner.
DESCRIPTION: How to reset drum count. SOLUTION ID: 51,831

SOLUTION: To reset drum counter, perform the following: USAGE: 9
1. Access 47 mode, output code 91, press Start\Print.
2. Power machine OFF\ON, press the P key then 3, to verify drum count.
DESCRIPTION: Copying is slow when the 1:2 copy mode with sheet/cover insertion is selected. SOLUTION ID: 51,473
SOLUTION: This is normal operation when sheet/cover insertion is selected. The machine must process the USAGE: 9
paper cassette change which adds to the process time. The slow copy speed also allows the fuser
temperature to remain constant in the event of thick originals.
DESCRIPTION: How to set the non-image erase from rectangular to oblique. SOLUTION ID: 50,959
SOLUTION: In the 25 mode, set DIPSW 8-0 to 1 to set the non-image erase from rectangular to oblique. USAGE: 9
Refer to page 6-4 in the 7060 Service manual.
DESCRIPTION: How to access the 4-digit key operator passcode, and the 8-digit ECM master key code. SOLUTION ID: 54,071
SOLUTION: Perform the following: USAGE: 8
2. Turn the copier back ON, while holding down the 2 and 5 keys.
3. Touch [6 Password setting] on the LCD.
4. Touch [1 Key operator password setting] on the LCD.
5. Key operator password setting will display in the blue band at the top of the LCD, along with the
current active password.
6. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the LCD.
7. Touch [2 ECM master key code setting] on the LCD.
8. ECM master code setting will display in the blue band at the top of the LCD, along with the
current active master code.
9. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the LCD.
10. Power the the copier OFF/ON.
DESCRIPTION: E70-11 or jam position 13 when small sized originals are copied from the platen glass with SOLUTION ID: 53,846
the copies exiting to the upper finisher tray.
SOLUTION: Programming incapatibility exists between the main body and the finisher when manually selecting USAGE: 8
8.5x11 paper and dipswitch 14-1 set to 1 (exit copies to upper tray in non-sort mode).
To program the copier to default to 8.5x11 when small originals are placed on the platen, set
dipswitches 7-4 and 7-5 to 1.
The following is a complete listing of settings for the dipswitches:
7-4 7-5 Size Selected
0 0 8.5x11R
0 1 8.5x11R
1 0 8.5x11R
1 1 8.5x11
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, can the paper source trays be the same on both machines? SOLUTION ID: 53,668
SOLUTION: The source tray default for the secondary copier is fixed and cannot be varied. This is a product USAGE: 8
limitation and will not be changed. The primary copier sends paper size data to the secondary

30
7060
copier . The secondary copier searches for that paper size in the following order of trays; tray 3, 4,
5, 1, and 2. The first tray that matches the paper size provided by the primary copier is the tray
selected to feed paper in the secondary copier.
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent 51-3 during copy run. SOLUTION ID: 78,186

SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed toner supply motor. USAGE: 8
SOLUTION: Replace the toner supply motor (p/n 25SA-3290).

Notes:
1. Ensure toner hopper drive gears and toner hopper are free of binds prior to motor replacement.
2. Toner motor may operate in 47 mode, output code 001, but at the incorrect speed.
DESCRIPTION: Hardware counter increments incorrectly when multiple sets of an odd number of originals SOLUTION ID: 71,048
are stapled in the 1:2 copy mode.
SOLUTION: Install the latest EPROMs (level 20.0). USAGE: 8
[[Latest EPROM level| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and [[Internal Link for
DESCRIPTION: The machine does not indicate ADD TONER. SOLUTION ID: 70,759
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect software dipswitch settings. USAGE: 8
SOLUTION: Access the 25 mode and set switch 4-0 to 0 and 4-1 to 0 to allow ADD TONER
message after 100 copies from the TLD detecting low toner in hopper.
Note: Other settings allow for 1000 copies with 4-0 to 1 and 4-1 to 0; 2000 copies with 4-0 to 0
and 4-1 to 1; or 3000 copies with 4-0 to 1 and 4-1 to 1.
DESCRIPTION: Dark streaks in the direction of lead-to-trail. SOLUTION ID: 65,645

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The drum fixed coupling (p/n 55FA-2090) is not fully inserted into the drum. This USAGE: 8
prevents the large cleaner idler gear (p/n 25SA77201) from properly aligning with the small cleaner
idler gear (p/n 55FA77070) which drives the toner collection roller.
SOLUTION: Remove the drum assembly and check the end of the drum shaft for damage.
Remove any burrs on the shaft with a file and ensure that the drum fixed coupling fits properly on
the end of the shaft. When the drum fixed shaft is properly installed, the teeth of the idler gears
should be fully meshed.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, does not exit last original after it is scanned. SOLUTION ID: 63,640
CAUSE: Failed PS301 (Original Detection).
SOLUTION: Replace PS301 (p/n 12ER85521).

Note: Can be recreated by placing an object over PS301 and PS304 (No paper sensor) is not
actuated when the last sheet is on the glass.
DESCRIPTION: J17-6 when feeding from Tray 3. Accordion jamming as paper enters the upper conveyance. SOLUTION ID: 63,296
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failed LCT conveyance clutch (CL3). USAGE: 8
SOLUTION: Replace CL3 (p/n 55FA82330) due to excessive wear.

Notes:
1. This clutch is not listed in the service manual. It can be found in the parts manual (first edition,
pages 84-85, reference number 2)
2. Thoroughly, clean and inspect all bushings, bearings, gears, and drive shafts associated with
any clutch prior to its replacement. Drive system binds can cause clutch slippage and produce
symptoms simulating clutch failure, which may actually be resolved with installation of a new clutch.
However, in such cases the symptom has been addressed rather than the underling cause of the
clutch slippage.
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent code E52-7. SOLUTION ID: 60,137

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failed main CB. USAGE: 8
SOLUTION: This code normally indicates an ADU fan motor (M152) locking abnormality. Confirm
operation of M152 using 47 mode, output code 042, P-0-6-P, print. The fan should rotate. If no

31
7060
operation occurs, reseat CN65 on the main CB and CN78 on the DCPS. If the fan rotates in
diagnostics, and the code still occurs, replace the main CB (p/n 55FA-9010) due to false
emergency signal interpretation.
DESCRIPTION: After an add paper indication from the bypass tray occurs, when paper is loaded, the SOLUTION ID: 57,755
machine does not feed paper from the bypass tray, but will feed from random paper trays in
the main body containing the same size paper.
SOLUTION: Escalated to Engineering: USAGE: 8
This problem was verified in the technical support lab machine with version 13 EPROMs.
Note: If you have equipment experiencing these symptoms, please submit a new problem through
DESCRIPTION: Cannot adjust second side feed timing in copier mode. Second side image is not lining up SOLUTION ID: 54,512
with the first side.
SOLUTION: The restart timing adjustment for the second side is available in the printer mode of 36 mode timing USAGE: 8
adjustment.

1. Wiring is pinched and shorted to the polygon cooling fan frame.
This causes ICP6 to open on the DCPS board, resulting in a loss of 24V DC.
To confirm shorted wiring, check for continuity with CN99 disconnected (power MUST be OFF
when checking for continuity) on DCPS CN99-3 and CN99-4 to frame ground. These two pins
should NOT indicate continuity. Repair the shorted wiring and replace the DCPS board (p/n
55FA84510) or replace ICP6 (p/n 963014060).
2. The polygon cooling fan motor (FM11) failed. This causes incorrect fan rotation speed.
Ensure that 24V DC is supplied to the DCPS, CN99-3 to GND. Inspect the connection at the fan
motor, reseat or repair as necessary. If the supply voltage is present, and the connection checks
good, replace FM11 (p/n 55FA80540).
DESCRIPTION: How to print the system configuration page, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 53,910
SOLUTION: If the machine is connected, perform the following: USAGE: 8
1. Press Mode and then Top Menu.
2. Use the arrows to scroll to the selection that you want to print.
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, unable to program either machine as the primary. SOLUTION ID: 53,628
SOLUTION: CAUSE: There is an image processing board EPROM incompatibility. USAGE: 8
SOLUTION: Confirm that the image processing board EPROMs on both machines are revision 14
or higher. Tandem EPROMs (level 10.0) are supplied in the kit. Konica recommends upgrading to
level 12.0, which includes the latest enhancements. In addition Tandem EPROM's are available
through the BBS at address 7060T-12.EXE and through the Parts Distribution Center as p/n:
Main CB
C1, IC22 (p/n 7060T122-12.0)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060T123-12.0)
Operation panel
O1, IC16 (p/n 7060T216-12.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060T217-12.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060T212-12.0)
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060T218-12.0)

I1, IC29 (p/n 7060B29-16.0)
I2, IC30 (p/n 7060B30-16.0)
DF310 RADF CB
IC7 (p/n DF31035-11.0)
FS103A Main CB
IC5 (p/n FS103AA7-12.0)

32
7060

DESCRIPTION: Copying 8.5x11 onto 8.5x14 using booklet mode, the image on page 2 is offset to the right. SOLUTION ID: 53,413
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The reduce and shift feature was not used. USAGE: 8
SOLUTION: To center the image on page 2 of the booklet using these paper sizes, perform the
following:
1. Select the paper sizes.
2. Press the application button on the op panel.
3. Press the booklet button on the touch screen.
4. Press the image shift button on the touch screen.
5. Press the reduce and shift button and press the arrows until the shift amount reads 10mm.
6. Press the OK button.
7. Press the OK button from the select application function window.
Note: Depending on the originals the image shift may need to be more or less.
DESCRIPTION: Blurred area one inch from trail edge. SOLUTION ID: 52,630
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect paper weight. The customer is using 65lb paper. USAGE: 8
SOLUTION: Advise customer to use paper that conforms to the specifications of the machine.
Recommended paper weight specifications are as follows:
a. 16 - 24lb bond paper for Main Body Trays (Tray 1, 2, 3, & 4) and the Large Capacity Tray
(LT-351).
b. 16 - 32lb for Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray.
c. 20 - 24lb for Automatic Duplex Unit.
See page 4-6 in the 7060 User's Manual.
DESCRIPTION: ECM mode does not reset to ENTER PASSWORD when auto reset occurs. SOLUTION ID: 50,524
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Password limits are not programmed. USAGE: 8
SOLUTION: To program password limits, perform the following:

1. Turn the power off, hold the help key and turn the power on.
2. If a key operator password is programmed, enter it now.
3. Select option 3 (ECM).
4. Enter master key code.
5. Select option 2 (ECM Count Limit Setting).
6. Press (Set Limit) and enter desired copy limit.
7. Press OK.
8. Press (Set No.).
9. Use the arrows to scroll to the next password account and repeat steps 6 thru 9.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, J72-68 while sort/stapling. SOLUTION ID: 87,060

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The downward conveyance sponge rollers in the FS103A are worn. USAGE: 8
SOLUTION: Replace the 2 downward conveyance sponge rollers (p/n 122H45250).

Notes:
1. The 2 rollers are positioned above PS5 (Stacker conveyance passage sensor).
2. Refer to page 10, item 25 of the FS103A Parts Catalog (6/98).
DESCRIPTION: Tray 3 is not recognized after it is empty and refilled. SOLUTION ID: 66,407
SOLUTION: CAUSE: PS141, No Paper Detect Sensor is defective. USAGE: 7
SOLUTION: Clean or replace PS141 (p/n 540085510). To check PS141, perform the following:
1. Access the 47 mode (power the machine OFF, then, while holding down the 4 and 7 keys,
power the machine ON).
2. In the 47 multimode, input code 010, press P-03-P.
3. Actuate PS141, and watch for a change of state on the control panel.
4. If no change occurs clean or replace PS141.
5. Power the machine OFF/ON to exit the 47 mode.
DESCRIPTION: J13-2 when feeding from Tray 3. SOLUTION ID: 73,919

33
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The paper tray is not properly lifting up to the feed tires due to the LCT lift up cable (front USAGE: 7
or rear) dislodged from the drive pulley.
SOLUTION: Reinstall the paper tray lift up cable.

Note: Verify proper tray tilt adjustment. Refer to the 7050 Service Manual (4/97), page 7-59 for tray
tilt adjustment procedure.
DESCRIPTION: Front Door Open Please Close message. SOLUTION ID: 73,826
SOLUTION: CAUSE: LCT drive motor causing a loss of all 40V DC and 24V DC on/to the main CB. USAGE: 7
SOLUTION: Replace the LCT drive motor assembly (p/n 55FA-1820).
DESCRIPTION: Paper feed skew from tray 4 (1500 sheet). SOLUTION ID: 70,108
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The rear tray 4 (1500 sheet) horizontal conveyance roller is not contacting the driven USAGE: 7
roller. This is caused when the conveyance unit is not pulled completely away from the main body
when removing a conveyance jam. The roller holder, or the tab, that locks the paper feed
open/close plate (p/n 25SA59061) down (via the magnet) becomes bent, and does not allow the
roller to come in contact with the driven roller. This results in drive imparted to the front roller only
(p/n 25AA44160), resulting in skew.
SOLUTION: Reform the [[locking tab or the roller holder| IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\CJH050.bmp
SCROLL]] and instruct the key operator.
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent jamming at drum. Drum claws do not shift position properly. SOLUTION ID: 63,838
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The rocking clutch (p/n 25SA20520) is installed with the positioning cam facing the wrong USAGE: 7
direction.
SOLUTION: Remove the rocking clutch from the rocking shaft (p/n 25SA20531). When
reinstalling the rocking clutch, ensure that the positioning cam is facing the rear side of the
machine, making physical contact with the clutch auxiliary plate (p/n 25SA-2240).
DESCRIPTION: Using copy/sheet insertion from the bypass tray, 2:2 mode, the first side of page two is SOLUTION ID: 58,398
blank. All other pages are correct from there.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Duplexing from the bypass tray is not available. Therefore, the second side will be USAGE: 7
printed in the 2:1 mode. All other pages will be printed out in 2:2 mode.
SOLUTION: Do not select the bypass as the cover sheet. Instead, select a tray as the cover sheet
tray.
DESCRIPTION: Copies have poor fill and definition, the Konica potential chart prints with the 0.20 gray scale SOLUTION ID: 57,954
blocks solid black; however, both the 0.30 and the 0.40 gray scale blocks are white with
black dashes. All test patterns run using the 36 mode, produce excellent quality prints.
[[Copy quality sample| IMAGE v:\bitmaps\CBC001.bmp SCROLL]]
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The image processing board (IPB) has failed. USAGE: 7
SOLUTION: Replace the image processing board (p/n 55FA-9500).
DESCRIPTION: Black copies. SOLUTION ID: 56,289

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect installation of the charging control plate (grid plate). USAGE: 7
SOLUTION: Ensure that the plate is mounted on the charge corona unit so the tension springs are
located at the rear of the corona unit.
DESCRIPTION: F22-1 during machine operation. SOLUTION ID: 56,271

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The operation for the charging corona wire cleaner was performed, but was either locked USAGE: 7
or did not complete a full cycle.
SOLUTION: Inspect the charge corona unit to verify that there is nothing blocking the movement of
the cleaning head and that it is correctly positioned. To disable the charge corona cleaning
operation, until parts can be ordered, perform the following:
2. Press 1 for software switch setting.
3. Use the up arrows to advance to switch 2-3.

34
7060
4. Press the on key to disable the charge corona cleaning operation.

5. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation. Note: This switch will only work with
level 13 or higher EPROMs.
DESCRIPTION: Part number for the 2nd paper feed clutch (MC3). SOLUTION ID: 56,088
SOLUTION: The part number for the 2nd paper feed clutch has been changed, and may not be updated in the USAGE: 7
parts catalog. The original MC3 (p/n 55FA82010) has been replaced by the MC3 (p/n 25SA82010)
which is installed on the 7050 and 7150.
Machines between serial numbers 55FE00001 and 55FE01130 need to have a MC3 modification
kit (p/n 7060-0001) installed (s/n's 55FE00147, 55FE00266, 55FE00771, 55FE00782, 55FE01030,
55FE01037, 55FE01065, 55FE01067, 55FE01073, 55FE01075, 55FE01129 are already modified).
Refer to [[7060 Technical Bulletin #4| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc168.bmp SCROLL]] for additional
information.
DESCRIPTION: When trying to access 25 and 47 modes the machine prompts for a passcode. SOLUTION ID: 53,837
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The passcode protection for the diagnostic modes has been enabled. USAGE: 7
SOLUTION: Enter the passcode 9272 to access the 25 or 47 modes. To disable this feature set
software dipswitch 2-6 to 0 in the 25 mode.
DESCRIPTION: Trail edge deletion. SOLUTION ID: 53,734

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Improper transfer current. USAGE: 7
SOLUTION: Replace the transfer separation corona assembly (p/n 55FA-2601).
DESCRIPTION: How to set the default startup mode to copier or printer. SOLUTION ID: 52,780
SOLUTION: The 7060 is available in both printer and copier mode simultaneously. As a printer, a small USAGE: 7
computer icon will be shown in the upper left corner of the LCD with READY displayed.
Note: Minimum of level 13 EPROMs are required.
DESCRIPTION: Where does the gear that is included with the PM kit get installed? SOLUTION ID: 51,343
SOLUTION: The gear is the Cleaner Idler Gear (p/n 55FA77070) located at the front of the drum unit which USAGE: 7
must be replaced at every PM. See page 7-2, item 15 and illustration on page 7-13.
Note: Gear D (p/n 55FA77060) was mistakenly installed in approximately 1,300 kits. Kits in stock
will be reworked to provide the correct part. Modified kits will be designated by a red mark on the
carton.

SOLUTION: CAUSE: There is a poor connection on the CVR board. USAGE: 7
SOLUTION: Reseat all connectors on the CVR board.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, noise from the RADF when running. SOLUTION ID: 50,123
CAUSE: The DF310 conveyance rollers are made of a sponge material. During shipping or
storage, the sponge flattens out. When copies are run, a noise is produced.
SOLUTION: During the course of operation, the noise will lessen. During initial set up, it is
recommended that the DF310 be run in diagnostics to speed up the recovery period. If noise is
experienced later into the life of the machine, replace the bottom plate with the new style (p/n
12ER45156). The hole size of the conveyance roller mounting brackets have been reduced to
eliminate vibration.
DESCRIPTION: How to change the default copy mode to 1:1. SOLUTION ID: 50,083
SOLUTION: To change the copy mode to 1:1, complete the following steps: USAGE: 7
1. Enter the key operator mode by pressing the (Help) button while turning the machine ON.
2. Select 1 for Initial setting.

35
7060
3. Select 1 for Copy Mode.

4. Change to desired setting.
5. Turn OFF the machine and power back ON.
DESCRIPTION: PLEASE WAIT COPIER WARMING UP message with the fuser lamps not coming on. SOLUTION ID: 122,863
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The fusing unit set interlock switch (MS4) is not being fully actuated or has failed. USAGE: 6
SOLUTION: Ensure that MS4 (p/n 25SA86010) is fully actuated and replace as needed.
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, J72-66 occurs only when running a print job. SOLUTION ID: 102,875
SOLUTION: CAUSE: PS4 in the FS103B failed. USAGE: 6
SOLUTION: To check PS4, perform the following:

1. Access the 47 multimode (power the machine ON while holding down on the 4 and 7 keys),
input code 76, press P-03-P.
2. Actuate PS4 to change the signal state of the photosensor (indicated on the operation panel).
3. If it does not change state, check the wires at the connector. If a wire has backed out or is
broken, repair or replace it. If the wire is good, replace PS4 (p/n 552085510).
DESCRIPTION: The ADU centering adjustment in 36 mode does not have the range to correct the ADU SOLUTION ID: 66,103
mis-centering.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: If the mis-centering is off by more than 2mm, the mechanical ADU centering adjustment USAGE: 6
must be performed prior to doing the centering adjustment in 36 mode.
SOLUTION: To perform this adjustment, refer to the illustrations for the centering adjustment of
the ADU in the Other Adjustments section of the service manual.
1. Loosen the two screws on the centering error adjustment plate of both sides of the ADU tray.
2. Loosen the two screws on the front ADU cover.
3. Move the centering error plate forward or backward to achieve proper centering.
4. Tighten the screws for the centering error adjustment plate and the front cover.
5. Refer to the 36 mode ADU centering adjustment if further adjustment is necessary.
DESCRIPTION: F57-1 after installing the video interface kit. SOLUTION ID: 54,085
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect level EPROMs installed. USAGE: 6
SOLUTION: Install the [[latest level 7060 EPROMs| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW
NoWordWrap]].

DESCRIPTION: J31-00 after the first copy of a multiple run exits the machine. SOLUTION ID: 91,576
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Excessive paper loop is being generated due to a binding upper paper feed (conveyance) USAGE: 6
clutch (p/n 55FA82040).
SOLUTION: Replace the upper conveyance clutch.

Note: As a troubleshooting measure, the clutch may be exchanged with the lower conveyance
clutch which is the same part number.
DESCRIPTION: J10-1, jam position 5 at power up. SOLUTION ID: 85,526

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The actuator to PS30 (bypass sensor) is stuck down. USAGE: 6
SOLUTION: Remove the feed unit to gain visible access to PS30. PS30 is located on the second
paper feed unit and should be visible once the feed unit is removed.
DESCRIPTION: Copies are reduced in a lead-to-trail direction. SOLUTION ID: 84,305

1. The 2nd paper feed rollers are worn. Replace the upper 2nd paper feed roller (p/n 55FA41060)
and lower 2nd paper feed roller (p/n 55FA41050).
2. A bind in the components driven by the main motor (M1). M1 provides drive to the following
components:
2nd paper feed unit
Fuser unit

36
7060
Toner conveyance screw

Conveyance unit
ADU Paper feed/conveyance drive unit (inversion/exit unit)
Note: Symptoms may also include improper registration that cannot be adjusted.
DESCRIPTION: LCD touchscreen locks up intermittently. SOLUTION ID: 75,427

SOLUTION: CAUSE: A hairline crack is on the LCD touchscreen. USAGE: 6
SOLUTION: Replace the LCD touchscreen (p/n 55FA87530).

Note: Perform the following to ensure that the touchscreen key click sound is ON:
1. Power OFF the copier.
2. Access the Key Operator Mode (press and hold the help key while powering ON the copier).
3. Select 9, Memory Switch.
4. Using the arrows, scroll to No. 17, (Key click sound).
5. Using the Change Contents button, select ON.
6. Power the copier OFF/ON to exit the Key Operator Mode.
DESCRIPTION: How to check the SIMMs volume of the E-RDH. SOLUTION ID: 69,532
SOLUTION: To check the SIMMs volume of the E-RDH, perform the following: USAGE: 6
2. Access the 47 mode, (power the copier ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys), output code 197.
3. The SIMMs volume will be displayed in the dark blue band at the top of the LCD, to the right of
OUT:
4. Power the copier OFF/ON to exit the 47 mode.
DESCRIPTION: Jam position 9, intermittent drum and separation jams. SOLUTION ID: 66,998
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The paper regulation sheets (p/n 25SA41231 front) and (p/n 25SA41241 rear) on the USAGE: 6
second paper feed unit are positioned incorrectly.
SOLUTION: Ensure that the paper regulation sheets are installed below the lip of the Lower paper
resist plate (p/n 25SA41031), not on top of the plate. (See item 16 on page 50, note the dash lines
on both items 5 and 6, this signifies that this is below or behind the plate.)
Note: The paper regulation sheets may have been installed incorrectly during manufacture. Refer
to the model 7060 parts catalog dated January 1998 page number 51 reference #5 and #6 for a
detailed view of the regulating sheets.
DESCRIPTION: Is PCL* available for the 7060? SOLUTION ID: 54,371

SOLUTION: The latest version print drivers and system software are available on the Konica [[FTP site| FILE USAGE: 6
V:\text\CBC009.txt NEW NoWordWrap]]. Refer to the [[FTP_ user site.txt file| FILE
V:\text\CBC010.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site
contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN
V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
DESCRIPTION: DF310, laser printed originals are smudged by the RADF. SOLUTION ID: 54,201
CAUSE: Excessive toner build up on the RADF double feed prevention roller.
SOLUTION: Clean the double feed prevention roller. If necessary replace the roller (p/n
12VR40310).
DESCRIPTION: Cannot print from a Macintosh* computer. SOLUTION ID: 53,742

SOLUTION: The following is required to print to a 7060 with IP302 controller from a Macintosh: USAGE: 6
1. The IP302 needs to be updated to the latest system software. The latest version system
2. KN101 network card with version 614F firmware or KN301 network card.
3. Adobe PostScript* option.
4. 32MB RAM minimum recommended.

37
7060
5. Ethernet network.
DESCRIPTION: Blank or abnormal display. SOLUTION ID: 53,446

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Because of the position of the ground springs (p/n 25SA-1080) attached to the read unit, USAGE: 6
removing the operation panel support plate (p/n 55FA70010) can dislodge the springs and drop
them onto the op panel.
SOLUTION: The ground springs have been repositioned during production process in machines
above s/n 55FA01668. Once a spring has fallen off, do not reuse the old tape. Reinstall the
ground spring using new tape.
DESCRIPTION: Are staples required in both staplers to select stapling in the front only? SOLUTION ID: 52,580
SOLUTION: Yes, staples are required in both staplers for the staple feature to be available. For short term, take USAGE: 6
some staples out of the full cartridge and load them in the empty one. Make sure to order new
staples (p/n 12QRK0010) and save the plastic staple cover (p/n 12QRK0020) as a receptacle for
the new staples.
DESCRIPTION: Touch panel display is blank. Background color is blue. SOLUTION ID: 52,458
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Faulty operation unit PCB (1). USAGE: 6
SOLUTION: Replace the operation unit PCB (1) (p/n 55FE-9020) to resolve the problem.
DESCRIPTION: How to program the RADF frame erase. SOLUTION ID: 51,730
SOLUTION: To program the RADF frame erase, perform the following steps: USAGE: 6
2. On the operation panel, press and hold the Help key down while powering the machine ON,
hold the Help key down for approximately 3 seconds.
3. Press 9 for Memory switch.
4. Use the up arrow key to scroll to No. 5 RADF frame erasure selection.
5. Press the Change Settings Contents key to select none, 2mm, 3mm, or 5mm.
6. Press the Previous screen key.
DESCRIPTION: ATS does not switch to a refilled tray. With ATS enabled, and Trays 1 and 2 loaded with the SOLUTION ID: 51,727
same size paper, ATS switches from Tray 1 to Tray 2, but does not switch back from Tray 2
to Tray 1 when Tray 1 is reloaded with paper.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This is normal operation due to restrictions imposed by patent infringement limitations. USAGE: 6
SOLUTION: Continuous switching back to previously used trays which have been reloaded is not
possible, and will not be changed. In this case, if Tray 1 empties, ATS switches to Tray 2. Even if
Tray 1 is reloaded, it does not elevate to the feed position. When Tray 2 empties, the unit stops
and requests a paper reload in Tray 2. Only after reloading Tray 2, when the START/PRINT button
is depressed, do both trays elevate.
DESCRIPTION: Toner supply idler gear (B) (p/n 25SA77310) wearing prematurely. SOLUTION ID: 51,410
1. Toner compacted in the toner hopper due to either the customer not following toner addition
procedures written on the cartridge label or customer adding toner when copies become light, not
when ADD TONER is indicated. Instruct customer how and when to add toner.
2. The worm gear may not properly mesh with the toner supply idler gear, causing the gear to wear
prematurely. Replace the toner supply idler gear(s) A (p/n 25SA77291) and B (p/n 25SA77311) as
well as the reinforcement plate (p/n 25SA32351).
DESCRIPTION: 2nd side blank when in the 1-2 mode with of 200 copies or more. Some copies are fine but SOLUTION ID: 50,732
eventually the second side will be blank with no image.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Level 11 EPROMs installed. USAGE: 6
SOLUTION: Update to the latest level EPROMs.

38
7060
[[EPROM history hyperlink| FILE V:\TEXT\EPROM\7060.TXT NEW]].
DESCRIPTION: How to copy one to two sided off the glass. SOLUTION ID: 50,635
SOLUTION: To copy one sided to two sided off the glass, perform the following: USAGE: 6
1. Select Store.
2. Select One to Two Sided mode and in the Applications, Non-image Area Erasure.
3. Press Set to store images.
DESCRIPTION: DF-310, intermittent J62-00 and noise when feeding. SOLUTION ID: 106,329
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The DFP (double feed prevention) paper feed guide lower is warped. USAGE: 5
SOLUTION: Replace the paper feed guide lower (p/n 12VR40010).
DESCRIPTION: Blank copies, no fault codes are displayed. SOLUTION ID: 54,570
SOLUTION: CAUSE: . The image processing unit has failed. USAGE: 5
SOLUTION: Reseat the connections on the image processing unit. If necessary replace the image
processing unit (p/n 55FA-9500).
DESCRIPTION: How to program the Weekly Timer for daylight savings time. SOLUTION ID: 53,028
SOLUTION: To program the Weekly Timer for daylight savings time, perform the following steps: USAGE: 5
1. Access the Key Operator Mode by pressing the help key with turning the power on.
2. Select Weekly Timer (option #8).
3. Select summertime (option #2).
4. Select summertime.
5. Power machine OFF/ON.
Note: 25 mode dipswitches should be verified for a 60-minute delay in the Weekly Timer mode.
The dipswitches should be programed as follows:
10-0: 0
10-1: 1
10-2: 1
10-3: 0
DESCRIPTION: Background on second side of duplexed copy. SOLUTION ID: 86,032

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The separation DC was set too high. USAGE: 5
SOLUTION: There is no set adjustment for the separation DC. However, it can be changed, and
should only be performed as a last resort. To adjust the separation DC, perform the following:
1. Access the 36 mode (power the machine ON while holding down on the 3 and 6 keys).
2. Press [1] High voltage auto adjustment.
3. [HIGH VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT (charging) SCREEN]
4. HV adjustment (separation DC) is indicated, and a number is also on the screen.
5. Using the numeric keypad subtract 10 from the number that is in the screen and touch the [set]
key.
DESCRIPTION: Thin black line on the trail edge of the copy in the front-to-rear direction when making SOLUTION ID: 81,763
reduction copies greater than 95%. The line occurs when the original is fed through the
RADF, or placed on the platen glass.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The erasure outside area of original is programmed as [erased for APS/AMS only], which USAGE: 5
results in a full charging scan during reduction copying.
SOLUTION: To change the programming for erasure outside area of original, perform the
following:
2. Access the Key Operator Mode (power the copier ON, while pressing the HELP key).
3. Touch [9. Memory switch] on the touchscreen.
4. Touch the up arrow located on the touchscreen 3 times, until [No. 4: Erasure outside of original]
is displayed at the top of the touchscreen.
5. Touch [change settings contents] on the touchscreen, until [Area outside of original erased] is
displayed at the top of the touchscreen.

39
7060
DESCRIPTION: Copy paper specifications. SOLUTION ID: 79,457

SOLUTION: High quality paper (16lb to 24lb bond) can be used from any paper tray including bypass. USAGE: 5
The following are allowable special papers:
* Label paper (Konica recommends PCUA 944410)
* OHP (transparency) film (Konica recommends PCUA 946427)
* Blueprint master
* Recycled paper
* High quality paper (14lb to 16lb bond, 24lb to 36lb bond)
Note: All heavy stock and special paper must be fed from the Bypass tray and Thick paper mode
selected from the Application screen.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, the original is not recognized. SOLUTION ID: 73,986

CAUSE: No original actuator (PS304) is broken.
SOLUTION: To check PS304 perform the following:

1. Access the 47 multimode (power the machine OFF, then, while holding down on the 4 and 7
keys, power the machine ON), input code 064, press P-02-P.
2. Install a original into the infeed section of the RADF.
3. A change of state should be indicated on the control panel.
4. If no change occurs, check the actuator (p/n12VR40470). If the actuator is not broken, replace
PS304 (p/n 684285520).
DESCRIPTION: DF310, is there a modification that enables the RADF to feed NCR PAPER* originals? SOLUTION ID: 72,976
There is no modification available to allow the successful use of NCR originals through the DF310.
The following are the DF310 paper specifications:
Ordinary paper - 16 to 24lb fine quality paper.
Special paper - Paper feed and conveyance ability may sometimes be inferior to those of 16 to 24lb
fine quality paper.
Note: The following kinds of paper CANNOT be used:
* OHP (transparency) film
* Blueprint masters
* Label paper
* Offset masters
* Pasted originals

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incompatible EPROM levels between the main CB, image processing board and the USAGE: 5
operation board.
SOLUTION: Install the correct compatible EPROMs.

Note: The following are the latest production level EPROMs per. 7060 Technical Bulletin #21:
Main CB
C1, IC22 (p/n 7060122-18.0)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060123-18.0)

I1, IC29 (p/n 7060B29-17.0)
I2, IC30 (p/n 7060B30-17.0)
Operation panel
O1, IC16 (p/n 7060216-14.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060217-13.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060212-13.0)
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060218-14.0)
Level 18 EPROMs are available from Konica's website as 7060-18A.EXE.


40
7060
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, can the FS103B exit documents face down (page print)? SOLUTION ID: 68,277
SOLUTION: The FS103B only allows face down printing (page printing) in the non-staple, single-sided mode. USAGE: 5
When duplexing or using finishing options with the FS-103B, the documents exit face up.
DESCRIPTION: F57-1 is displayed at power up and the LCD is very dim. SOLUTION ID: 66,690
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The LCT interlock sensor (PS160) is shorted to frame ground. USAGE: 5
SOLUTION: To check the operation of the LCT interlock sensor, perform the following:
1. Power the copier ON.
2. Using a voltmeter (20V DC range), check the LCT interlock sensor supply voltage at CN83-B5
on the main CB. A reading of 5V DC should be observed.
3. Check the LCT interlock sensor input at CN83-B7 on the main CB. With the lower paper feed
unit door closed a reading of 0V DC should be observed. With the lower paper feed door open, the
voltage reading should be 5V DC. If the voltage change is not observed, inspect the lower paper
feed unit wiring harness for pinched wires and the LCT interlock sensor for damage. Replace the
LCT interlock sensor (p/n 540085510) as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: 7060 supply compatibility with other similar models. SOLUTION ID: 66,008
SOLUTION: The PCUA numbers for similar models are listed below: USAGE: 5
7050
Toner (PCUA 950757)
Developer (PCUA 950754)
Drum (PCUA 950755)
7060
Toner (PCUA 950787)
Drum (PCUA 950786)
7150
Toner (PCUA 950799)
Drum (PCUA 950786)
FORCE 50
Toner (PCUA 950757)
Drum (PCUA 950755)
FORCE 60
Toner (PCUA 950787)
Drum (PCUA 950786)
DESCRIPTION: How to disable a paper tray as a temporary measure. SOLUTION ID: 65,584
SOLUTION: To disable a paper tray as a temporary measure (troubleshooting, parts required, etc.), set address USAGE: 5
13 in the 25 mode, using one of the following selections:
Set 13-0 to a 1 to isolate Tray 1 as a temporary measure.
Note: The default setting for all bits of dipswitch 13 is zero. This information was omitted in the
original 7060 Service Manual. 7060/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #17 (1/4/99) contains this and
other updated information for the 7060 Service Manual.
DESCRIPTION: E41-4 code at power up. SOLUTION ID: 65,022

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Glass open trouble. PS8 was not flagged by right side holder plate. USAGE: 5
SOLUTION: Set original glass, and place the right side glass holder plate (p/n 25SA12510) in
place, and power ON the copier.
DESCRIPTION: Tandem printer, what EPROMs are required for tandem printing? SOLUTION ID: 63,983

41
7060
SOLUTION: For tandem printing, a minimum version 16.0 EPROMs are needed. EPROMs are available from USAGE: 5
Konica's website and through the Parts Distribution Center.
[[Latest EPROM level, 7060. | FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and [[Internal
Link for Faxing/Printing current 7060 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
DESCRIPTION: How does the FS103B allow page printing? SOLUTION ID: 61,104
SOLUTION: The FS103B only allows page printing in the non-staple, single-sided mode. USAGE: 5
DESCRIPTION: How many sheet insertions can be done? SOLUTION ID: 60,312
SOLUTION: 50 originals can be scanned into memory using the RADF. 250 originals can be stored using USAGE: 5
platen memory on the glass.

SOLUTION: CAUSE: A poor connection between the main CB and the operation boards. USAGE: 5
SOLUTION: After verifying all DCPS outputs and all DC voltage test points on the main CB, reseat
CN3 on the main CB. Also reseat CN219 (OB1) and CN222 (OB3) which are accessed by
removing the right side cover (paper feed side). The connectors are located at the upper left
corner, just below the operation panel.
DESCRIPTION: How to enable the jam code display. SOLUTION ID: 57,981
SOLUTION: Perform the following steps: USAGE: 5
1. Verify that the latest version EPROMs are installed.
2. Power the machine ON while pressing [2] and [5].
3. Press [1] for Software Switch Settings.
4. Use arrows and scroll to 2:2.
5. Press [1] and then [Previous Screen] button.
6. Power machine OFF and then ON.
DESCRIPTION: How to disable image rotate. SOLUTION ID: 53,921

SOLUTION: Rotation can be programmed by performing the following: USAGE: 5
1. Hold the HELP key while turning the machine ON.
2. Select #9 (Memory Switches).
3. Select switch #21 (Rotation)
4. Selections are OFF, ON, APS/AMS only.
5. After making selection, power OFF and back ON.
DESCRIPTION: How to adjust the lead edge void in the Non-image Area Erase mode. SOLUTION ID: 53,849
SOLUTION: The lead edge void produced during Non-image Area Erase mode, typically a maximum of 4.0mm, USAGE: 5
is not adjustable. During the image read sequence, it prevents copying of the underside of the
platen stopper plate.
DESCRIPTION: Can sheets with tabs or dividers be run through the machine? SOLUTION ID: 53,516
SOLUTION: Sheets with tabs can be used as long as it meets the paper size/weight specifications of the USAGE: 5
machine. This paper should only be used in the bypass tray.
DESCRIPTION: Booklet mode pages are enlarged, or out of order, or are printed on wrong size paper from a SOLUTION ID: 52,797
desktop publishing application.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The user is selecting all the print setting in the publishing application (i.e. Adobe USAGE: 5
PageMaker*, QuarkXPress*, Microsoft Publisher*, etc.) which should only be selected in the
Konica print driver.
SOLUTION: To achieve proper booklet printing perform the following:

1. In the desktop publising application, create the document with the page layout settings to 8.5x11
paper, portrait mode, 1 up.
Note: DO NOT select booklet printing or any other special print options here. It will be later
selected in the Konica print driver options.
2. At time of printing, select booklet mode in the Konica print driver. This option will automatically
select duplexing and 11x17 paper. (Correct booklet printing can only be accomplished using 11x17
paper.)

42
7060
DESCRIPTION: F52-4 during operation. SOLUTION ID: 52,732

1. The optics cooling fan (FM2) is faulty. Check CN97 (near rear optics unit), CN83 on the main
CB and intermediate CN128 (located to the right of the main CB). If necessary replace FM2 (p/n
25SA80511).
2. Internal arcing in the charge corona unit. Replace charge corona unit (p/n 55FA-2500).
DESCRIPTION: Are memory chips (DALLAS) available separately? SOLUTION ID: 52,393
SOLUTION: The NOVRAM is (p/n 943013400). It is used on the following models: 2230, 3340, 4345, 4355, USAGE: 5
7150, and 7060.
Note: The models 7150 and 7060 have two (2) NOVRAM positions. Ensure that this part (p/n
943013400) is installed in the IC21 location, the time keeper (p/n 55FAK0010) is installed at the
IC24 location. A procedure must be obtained from Technical Support for process initialization after
NOVRAM replacement.
DESCRIPTION: When a J62 occurs, there are two sheets of paper jammed in the main body. SOLUTION ID: 52,251
SOLUTION: Version 13.0 Firmware (and later) provides "flushing" of copies in process if an RADF jam occurs. USAGE: 5
DESCRIPTION: Unable to enter correct copy quantity. SOLUTION ID: 51,427

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Copy limit function is enabled. USAGE: 5
SOLUTION: To program the copy quantity limit in the 25 mode, perform the following:
2. Access the 25 mode, (power the machine ON, while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
3. Select [1] Software switch setting.
4. Select the dipswitch number by pressing the up/down arrows
5. Use the matrix below to determine which value inputs at DIPSW 9 (bits 0, 1, 2, and 3 should be
entered to select the copy quantity limit desired by the customer):
9-0 to 0 9-1 to 0 9-2 to 0 9-3 to 0: No limit
9-0 to 1 9-1 to 0 9-2 to 0 9-3 to 0: Copy limit = 1
6. Press the ON/OFF key to input the desired setting of 0 (OFF), or 1 (ON) for bit location 0.
7. Press the rightmost up arrow once, until 1 is displayed to the right of 9.
8. Repeat the procedure in steps 6 and 7 for dipswitches 9-1, 9-2, 9-3.
DESCRIPTION: LT351, jamming at entrance. SOLUTION ID: 51,354

SOLUTION: CAUSE: LCT clutch is slipping USAGE: 5
SOLUTION: Clean LCT clutch. Clutches on new machines may have become soiled during
transport and should be cleaned thoroughly.
DESCRIPTION: What is Job Memory Auto Recall used for? SOLUTION ID: 50,376
SOLUTION: When selected, Memory Switch #18 (Job Memory Auto Recall) automatically recalls Job Memory USAGE: 5
No.15. Job Memory No.15 can be programmed for any special function required at copier
initialization.
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent J21. SOLUTION ID: 69,187

43
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: When the J21 occurs, the copy separates from the drum, but does not enter the fusing USAGE: 5
unit. The cause is a soiled or failed TCSB (toner control sensor board).
SOLUTION: Clean/replace the TCSB (p/n 25SA-9100).
DESCRIPTION: Machine power cycles OFF/ON, and can not access service modes. SOLUTION ID: 119,265
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A lose of 24VDC at CN2-2 of the DCPS due to a loose connection. USAGE: 4
SOLUTION: Reseat CN2 on the DCPS. Ensure that all wires are properly seated in the connector.
Note: Using the end of a meter lead may assist in properly seating the wires in the connector.
DESCRIPTION: Skewed copies second side only. SOLUTION ID: 92,967

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The exit driven rollers on the ADU reversing/exit unit have become dislodged or are USAGE: 4
positioned incorrectly.
SOLUTION: Reinstall or reposition the paper exit driven rollers on the ADU reversing/exit unit.
The following parts are associated with the white driven rollers:
White driven roller (p/n 25SA43420)
Driven shaft holder (p/n 25SA43310)
Conveyance driven shaft (p/n 25SA43220)
DESCRIPTION: Toner spots on copies. SOLUTION ID: 86,347

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The toner spots are due to a turned up scraper on the toner collection roller assembly. USAGE: 4
SOLUTION: To prevent the scraper from interfering with the toner collection roller, the scraper has
been lengthened. Replace the toner collection roller assembly (p/n 55TA-2040) with the new style
(p/n 55WA-2040).
DESCRIPTION: F51-2 prior to the completion of warm-up. SOLUTION ID: 82,429

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The lower fixing claws have dug into the lower fixing roller, which creates a bind to the USAGE: 4
main motor (M1) drive system.
SOLUTION: To check the lower fixing roller, perform the following:

2. Open the front door and extract the fuser unit.
3. Visually inspect the lower fuser roller and separation claws for any signs of damage.
4. Replace the lower fixing claws (p/n 25BA53330) and the lower fixing roller (p/n 55FA53200) as
necessary.
DESCRIPTION: E46-11 when unit is operating as a printer and running long mail merge jobs. SOLUTION ID: 77,171
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This is an issue that is corrected by installing level 17.1 Image Processing Board USAGE: 4
EPROMs.
SOLUTION: Install level 20.0 EPROMs with level 17.1 Image Processing EPROMs as listed
below.
Main CB
C1, IC22 (p/n 7060122-20.0)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060123-20.0)

11, IC29 (p/n 70601329-17.1)
12, IC30 (p/n 70601330-17.1)
These are upgraded Image Processing EPROMs that prevent display of E46-11 Code when unit is
operating as a printer and running long mail merge jobs. Level 17.1 I1/12 EPROMs are also
available from Konica's website as 7060-IB.EXE.
Operation panel
O1, IC16 (p/n 7060216-14.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060217-13.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060212-13.0)
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060218-14.0)
Notes:
1. See [[7060/7065/7150/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #26| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc166.bmp
SCROLL]] for more details.

44
7060
2. Level 20.0 EPROMs are available from Konica's website (www.konicabt.com) as

7060-20A.EXE.
DESCRIPTION: Developing unit spewing developer. SOLUTION ID: 74,705

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The OPC material of the drum is damaged exposing the aluminum core. This causes USAGE: 4
developer to adhere to the drum.
Note: Examine the drum carefully, small pit marks will be enough to cause the developer spew.
SOLUTION: Replace the drum (PCUA 950786). Also replace the cleaning blade (p/n
25SA-2060), toner guide roller (55FA-2040), and developer (PCUA 950754).
DESCRIPTION: PLEASE TURN THE COPIER OFF/ON IF SC STILL OCCURS CALL SERVICE CENTER, a letter SOLUTION ID: 74,316
H is in the quantity window.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed main CB. USAGE: 4
SOLUTION: Replace the main CB (p/n 55FA-9018).

Notes:
1. The 7060 will allow single quantity copying but the touchscreen is inoperable.
2. The 7060 may power up normally after repeated OFF/ON and stay normal until it is powered
OFF and back ON.
DESCRIPTION: PLEASE WAIT COPIER WARMING UP message. SOLUTION ID: 87,975

SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed main CB. The fuser comes to temperature and the lamps cycle ON/OFF, but the USAGE: 4
copier never comes to ready.
SOLUTION: Replace the main CB (p/n 55FA-9010).
DESCRIPTION: PLEASE LOAD 8.5x11R is displayed when using 8.5x11R and 8.5x14 originals in mixed SOLUTION ID: 73,111
original mode, and rotation ON. 8.5x11R paper is unavailable.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This is normal operation. The rotation feature does not function when mixed original USAGE: 4
mode is selected. The user reference guide is incorrect.
SOLUTION: Load 8.5x11R paper.
DESCRIPTION: After running a proof set of a job and pressing the START/PRINT key, followed by the SOLUTION ID: 63,048
STATUS key, the status screen pages left display is blank and the minutes to go display is
also blank.
This operational pattern is also observed on our lab machine. A fax will be sent to Japan
requesting a review of the proof feature and its effect on the status function.
DESCRIPTION: How to make all copies darker or lighter without adjusting charge or bias. SOLUTION ID: 60,136
SOLUTION: Change the density shift adjustment for text or photo mode by performing one of the following: USAGE: 4
1. To adjust the Text mode, press P, 6 and START PRINT.

2. Press a number from 0 to 5 (0 lighter, 5 darker) to change the density.
3. Press START PRINT and then STOP/CLEAR.
1. To adjust the Photo mode, press P, 7 and START PRINT.

2. Press a number from 0 to 5 (0 lighter, 5 darker) to change the density.
3. Press START PRINT and then STOP/CLEAR.
DESCRIPTION: J94 when copying or printing. SOLUTION ID: 59,048

SOLUTION: CAUSE: If paper guide bars (B) and (C) in the ADU become warped, they may prevent the proper USAGE: 4
exit of copy paper. This will be displayed as a J94 (ADU paper exit jam) error code.

45
7060
SOLUTION: New guides are available that address this problem. Install new style paper guide (B)
(p/n 25SA50052) and paper guide bar (C) (p/n 25SA50063). They have been installed during
production beginning with serial number 55FE01024. This is not a mandatory modification. These
parts should be installed when this jam occurs in the ADU. See [[7060 Technical Bulletin #15|
IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJC083.bmp SCROLL]] for more detailed information.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, paper jamming in the shift assembly. The shift assembly is not in the home SOLUTION ID: 57,365
position.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The finisher CB has failed. USAGE: 4
SOLUTION: Monitor the shift assembly at power up. The slide arm (p/n 12QR46110) should be
parallel within the assembly to its edges and the actuating part of slide gear B (p/n 12QR77090)
should be to the immediate left of shift home position photosensor (PS18). If not, the finisher CB is
either not detecting operation of PS18 or is not controlling the drive of the shift motor properly. If
necessary replace the finisher CB (p/n 122H-9010).
DESCRIPTION: How to enable/disable ATS for a particular paper tray. SOLUTION ID: 55,483
SOLUTION: To enable/disable ATS for a particular paper tray, perform the following: USAGE: 4
1. Access the Key Operator Mode (while pressing the HELP key, power the machine ON). If
required, enter a 4-digit key operator password and press OK.
2. Press item 9, for Memory switch.
3. Press the up/down arrows to select a desired item which is displayed on the upper line of the
message bar. Press the Change Setting Contents key to select a specific setting of that item which
is displayed on the lower line of the message bar.
4. Switch numbers 9 -13 allow trays 1 -5, respectively, to be enabled/disabled for ATS/APS.
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier ECM operation. SOLUTION ID: 54,249

SOLUTION: For tandem copiers with ECM, EPROM levels on the main CB must be at level 12.0 or higher. USAGE: 4
Tandem EPROMs are required (the minimum level, 10.0 are supplied in the kit; we recommend
upgrade to 12.0 which includes the latest ECM enhancements). In addition Tandem EPROM's are
available through the BBS at address 7060T-12.EXE and through the Parts Distribution Center as
p/n:
Main CB
C1, IC22 (p/n 7060T122-12.0)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060T123-12.0)
Operation panel
O1, IC16 (p/n 7060T216-12.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060T217-12.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060T212-12.0)
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060T218-12.0)

I1, IC29 (p/n 7060B29-16.0)
I2, IC30 (p/n 7060B30-16.0)
DF310 RADF CB
IC7 (p/n DF31035-11.0)
FS103A Main CB
IC5 (p/n FS103AA7-12.0)

See [[ECM Operation for the 7060 Tandem Copier| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJC093.bmp SCROLL]] for
more detailed information.
DESCRIPTION: Can the white border space the copies have on all sides be adjusted? SOLUTION ID: 53,967
SOLUTION: There will always be a border of white space on all copies and prints from a digital machine. There USAGE: 4
are no adjustments to change this.
DESCRIPTION: Jam position 13 displayed while duplexing. SOLUTION ID: 69,215

46
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The upper fuser cover is not properly latched, causing contact between the ADU middle USAGE: 4
paper guide plate (inversion gate) and the fuser upper exit guide plate.
SOLUTION: Inspect the fuser upper cover for proper latching. If it is difficult to latch or unlatch, the
cover hinge arms may be contacting the cleaning roller shaft holder assemblies. If contact is
present, loosen the set screws on the shaft holder assemblies and reposition the assemblies until
there is no contact and the upper fuser cover latches and unlatches easily.
DESCRIPTION: The image of second page is on the trail edge of the first page, copying 8.5x11 originals onto SOLUTION ID: 53,769
8.5x11 at 65% reduction.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: When using DF310, two documents are on the glass at the same time as they are being USAGE: 4
scanned. Set Memory dip switch #4 to Area Outside of Original Erased.
SOLUTION: Reprogram memory switch by performing the following:

1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. While pressing and holding the (Help) key on the operation panel, turn the main power switch
ON. Release the (Help) key after approximately 3 seconds.
3. Press 9, memory switches.
4. Using the up arrow key, scroll to 4 Erasure Outside Area of Original.
5. Press the (Change Contents) button so that Area Outside of Original Erased only is displayed.
6. Turn OFF the main power switch.
7. Turn ON the main power switch. The adjustment is now complete.
DESCRIPTION: In ECM mode, how to exit in the middle of a copying job and return to the enter password SOLUTION ID: 53,100
screen.
SOLUTION: To exit in the middle of a copying job and return to the enter password screen, in ECM mode, USAGE: 4
1. Press the Reset button.
2. Then press and hold the P button down, press the C button.
Note: This will work if the machine runs out of paper and the customer wishes not to continue the
copying job.
DESCRIPTION: Document feeder ejecting originals too far. SOLUTION ID: 52,908
1. The photo sensors in the document feeder are soiled. Clean the photo sensors and the light
absorbing (black) patches underneath them. The most likely photo sensors are in the area of the
turn around guide in the document feeder.
2. The original exit motor (M303) is driving excessively fast so that the originals exit too far into the
exit area of the RADF. Reseat CN103 on the RADF CB and CN113 on M303 and inspect the
harness for any damage to the wires. Repair as needed.
DESCRIPTION: When the 7060 is in shutdown mode from the Weekly Timer, can the machine be used? SOLUTION ID: 52,785
SOLUTION: The machine can be used by pressing the POWER SAVER ON/OFF button. The key operator may USAGE: 4
have activated a password for this function. If the display shows ENTER PASSWORD contact the
key operator. Refer to page 5-5 in the 7060 User's Reference Guide.
DESCRIPTION: Can the 7060 be set to copy in 600dpi? SOLUTION ID: 52,513
SOLUTION: The 7060 copies in 400dpi only. USAGE: 4
DESCRIPTION: Drum replacement interval. SOLUTION ID: 52,425

SOLUTION: The drum (PCUA 950786) should be replaced every 300,000 copies. The drum is exclusively for USAGE: 4
the model 7060 and 7150.
Note: The drum separating claws (set of 3) (p/n 55FA-2030) must be installed when the drum is
replaced.
DESCRIPTION: Are the video interface kits the same for the 7060 and 7050? SOLUTION ID: 51,626
SOLUTION: The 7050 video interface kit is the same for the 7060, except for the wiring 3 harness (p/n USAGE: 4
12ST90180), EPROMs and fly wheel. All other items in the kit can be used on the 7060. The 7060
video interface kit cannot be used on a 7050 due to the missing harness and fly wheel. Note: Do
not use the EPROMs from the 7050 kit for the 7060. The list below is the minimum EPROM
configuration for the 7060:
Main CB

47
7060
IC22 (p/n 7060122-15.0)

IC23 (p/n 7060123-15.0)
Operation panel board

ROM1 (p/n 7060216-14.0)
ROM2 (p/n 7060217-13.0)
ROM3 (p/n 7060212-13.0)
ROM4 (p/n 7060218-13.0)
Note: Level 13 operation board ROM4 will display as a 11 when viewed in 25 mode, address 9.
This is only a problem with the display, not with the functionality of the EPROM.

IC29 (p/n 7060B29-16.0)
IC30 (p/n 7060B30-16.0)
DF310 RADF CB
IC7 (p/n DF31035-11.0)
FS103A main CB
IC5 (p/n FS103AA7-12.0)
Note: Level 15 corrects a problem in level 14. Level 14 was factory installed in 250 United States
machines but was not distributed via Parts Distribution or available as a download format in the
United States.
Level 15 enhancement
Corrects a problem unique to level 14 with an interrupted job. As the interrupt process is
completed, the original job was cleared or lost.
DESCRIPTION: How to enable the duplex mode (1:2 or 2:2) with GROUP MODE selected. SOLUTION ID: 51,334
SOLUTION: This feature is automatically available provided that EPROM level 13 or greater is installed. USAGE: 4
Version 13.0 (KBBS filename 7060-13A.EXE) consists of the following part numbers which should
be installed as a set:
706012-13.0 (main CB, IC22)

706013-13.0 (main CB, IC23)
7060B9-14.0 (IPB, IC29)
7060B0-14.0 (IPB, IC30)
706021-13.0 (op panel, IC1)
706022-12.0 (op panel, IC2)
706023-12.0 (op panel, IC3)
706024-12.0 (op panel, IC4)
Version 13.2 (KBBS filename 7060-13C.EXE) consists of the following part numbers which should
be installed as a set:
Level 13.2 allows usage of either the manual bypass tray or tray 5 (LCT) when the thick/thin paper
mode is selected in the APPLICATIONS mode to provide increased paper capacity (normal
production EPROM only allows use of the manual bypass tray).
706012-13.2 (main CB, IC22)

706013-13.2 (main CB, IC23)
7060B9-14.0 (IPB, IC29)
7060B0-14.0 (IPB, IC30)
706021-13.0 (op panel, IC1)
706022-12.0 (op panel, IC2)
706023-12.0 (op panel, IC3)
706024-12.0 (op panel, IC4)
DESCRIPTION: Can the FS103 be installed on the model 7060? SOLUTION ID: 50,792
SOLUTION: The FS103 cannot be installed on the 7060. Only the FS103A or FS103B can be installed. USAGE: 4

48
7060
Note: The FS103A can be used on the 7050, 7060, 7150, FORCE 50 and the FORCE 60, while the
FS103B can be used on the 7060, 7150 and the FORCE 60.
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, intermittent J72 or miscellaneous main body jam codes during copy process SOLUTION ID: 126,081
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Finisher front door interlock (MS1) actuator is deformed resulting in an intermittent loss of USAGE: 3
24V DC.
SOLUTION: To verify the operation of the finisher front door interlock (MS1), perform the following:
2. Access the 47 multimode (power the copier ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys) input code 76,
press P-26-P.
3. Open/Close the front door of the FS103 to see a change of state on the display. If no change of
state occurs, reform the actuator for the front door interlock (MS1) to allow for a more positive throw
when the front door closes or replace finisher front door actuator as necessary (p/n 12AR45611).

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The L2 and L3 rear fixing lamp terminal positions have been switched, causing the triac USAGE: 3
on the DCPS to fail.
SOLUTION: To check the L2 and L3 rear fixing lamp terminals for proper installation, perform the
following:
2. Remove the fixing unit from the copier.
3. Remove the lamp cover (p/n 55FA53070) from the rear of the fixing unit.
4. Visually inspect the rear fixing lamp terminal positions. The proper lamp terminal for (L3), the
longer 1000 watt lamp, which is located on the exit side of the fixing unit is (p/n 55FA-5470). This
lamp terminal is 60mm in length. The proper lamp terminal for (L2), the shorter 300 watt lamp,
which is located on the entrance side of the fixing unit is (p/n 55FA-5480). This lamp terminal is
50mm long.
5. Ensure the fixing lamp terminals are positioned properly. The shorter 50mm lamp terminal
connects to the shorter fixing lamp. The longer 60mm lamp terminal connects to the longer fixing
lamp.
6. Reinstall the lamp cover and insert the fixing unit into the copier.
7. Access the 47 mode (power the copier ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys). No fixing lamps
should be lit while in the 47 mode. If any of the fixing lamps are lit, the DCPS has been damaged
due to the improper positioning of the rear fixing lamp terminals. Replace the DCPS (p/n
55FA84510) as necessary.
Note: Removal of the rear lamp terminals from the lamp support material rear (p/n 55FA53020) is
not recommended, since the lamp terminals can inadvertently be installed in the wrong position.
DESCRIPTION: J30-1 occurs during duplex mode. SOLUTION ID: 116,700

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The T/S corona unit failed. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: To check the T/S corona, perform the following:

1. Slide the T/S corona unit out until it no longer is connected, but still in the machine.
2. Make 10 duplexed copies.
3. If the copies come out and no jam code appears, replace the T/S corona unit (p/n 55FA-2601).
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, J72-66 during operation. SOLUTION ID: 115,857

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The return spring for the printer exit gate is broken. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: Replace the solenoid return spring (p/n 12QR45700)
DESCRIPTION: Unable to print. The IP controller appears to intermittently lock up. Rebooting the controller SOLUTION ID: 112,579
may temporarily resolve the problem.
SOLUTION: New engine EPROMs for the 7150 and 7060 are now available to address IP302 lockup issues. USAGE: 3
Please install the new firmware if experiencing lockups. The new [[special firmware| URL
ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com/MainBody_printers/Special_firmware]] can be downloaded
from the FTP site.
The new firmware must be installed in conjunction with the following EPROM versions that can be
downloaded on the Konica web site (or FTP site):
C1=17 (7150) 21 (7060)
C2=17 (7150) 21 (7060)
I1=13 (7150) 17 (7060)
I2=13 (7150) 17 (7060)
O1=14.0 (7150/7060)

49
7060
02=13.0 (7150/7060)
03=13.0 (7150/7060)
04=14.0 (7150/7060)
Note: These newest EPROMs should be installed with the latest [[system software version 4.2.6|
URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com/iP_units/System_Software/IP303]], which also can be
downloaded from the FTP site.
DESCRIPTION: E47-5 during warm-up. SOLUTION ID: 107,826

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failed write unit. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: Replace the write unit (p/n 55FA-6501).

Notes:
1. E46-8 may also occur during warm-up.
2. The E47-5 error code can be caused if the 7060 is moved while it is ON.
DESCRIPTION: Incorrect registration, approximately the last 30mm of original or test print is printed at the SOLUTION ID: 107,647
lead edge of the copy.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Erroneous 36 mode timing data is stored in memory. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: To reset 36 mode timing to Standard Data Settings, perform the following:
1. Access the 36 mode (power machine ON while holding down the 3 and 6 keys).
2. Press 2, [Timing adjustment].
3. Press 9, [Recall Standard Data].
4. Press YES to reset Drum clock/Horizontal adjustment data to factory settings.
5. Press 9, [Recall Standard Data].
6. Press NEXT then YES to reset Restart timing data to factory settings.
7. Continue with steps 5 and 6 until all the timing adjustments have been reset.
8. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN button.
9. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal copy mode.
Notes:
1. Adjustment 8, [Laser Adjustment] cannot be reset to standard data.
2. It may be necessary, after Recalling Standard Data, to slightly readjust the timing adjustments to
achieve optimum paper to image timing.
DESCRIPTION: Gray banding from front-to-rear. SOLUTION ID: 100,228

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Oxidation on the contacts of the memory modules (SIMMs). This can be confirmed by USAGE: 3
making a copy using Very High mode. Copies made with Very High mode do not use the SIMM
memory and will not exhibit banding.
SOLUTION: Clean the SIMM memory contacts. Ensure that the recommended memory modules
are installed.
Note: Performance is guaranteed only with Konica MU103 SIMM memory modules. Other
manufacturer's SIMMs have not been specifically tested by Konica. The memory module MU103 is
32MB at 60 or 70ns with non-parity and tin-plated contacts.
DESCRIPTION: Codes 17-03 and 94-00 when duplexing. SOLUTION ID: 97,631
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The front ADU clutch (p/n 55FA82211) is worn. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: Replace the front ADU clutch as needed.
DESCRIPTION: FRONT DOOR IS OPEN PLEASE CLOSE message at power up. SOLUTION ID: 95,421
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A loss of 24V DC, on the DCPS CN78 and 99, due to a pinched wire to frame ground for USAGE: 3
the bypass feed clutch MC7. Normally, DCPS CN78-1 through CN78-5 should all be 24V DC and
CN78-6 and 7 should be ground. DCPS CN99-1, 2 and 3 should all be 24V DC and CN99-4 and 5
are ground.
SOLUTION: Repair the pinched wire to MC7.

Note: The DCPS should reset from being overloaded if the 7060 is powered OFF and unplugged
for approximately 15 minutes.
DESCRIPTION: Poor copy quality, lines running lead-to-trail. SOLUTION ID: 65,843
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failed CCD unit. Copy quality is fine with internal test patterns. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: Replace CCD unit (p/n 55FA-6400).

50
7060
DESCRIPTION: How to adjust paper feed loop adjustment. SOLUTION ID: 65,048
SOLUTION: Adjust the loop for each tray in the 36 mode, by performing the following: USAGE: 3
1. Power OFF the copier, hold 3 and 6 and power ON the copier.
2. Select 2. Timing Adjustment
3. Select 3. Paper Feed Loop Adjustment
4. Press the Next adjustment key and select the paper feed tray that is to be adjusted.
5. Enter a value from the numeric keypad, then touch the Set key. The input range is -20 (small),
00 (standard), +99 (large).
Note: (1 step =0.1 msec)
Refer to page 6-30 in the 7060 Service Manual (9/97).
DESCRIPTION: Can sheet insertion be done while printing? SOLUTION ID: 53,978
SOLUTION: Sheet insertion is a copier function only. It cannot be done while printing. USAGE: 3
DESCRIPTION: How to program auto-tray switching to switch from Tray 5 to Tray 4? SOLUTION ID: 52,059
SOLUTION: To program auto-tray switching to switch from Tray 5 to Tray 4, perform the following; USAGE: 3
1. Access the Key Operator Mode by turning the machine OFF, press and hold the HELP key and
then turn the machine ON.
2. Touch 9 Memory Switch to display the Memory Switch screen.
3. Touch the up arrow 5 times to display [6] Automatic Tray Switching. Touch the Change Setting
Contents to change ATS from OFF to ON. Then press the Previous Screen button to return to the
Memory Switch Screen.
4. Press the down arrow 3 times to item #09 ATS/APS switch (Tray 1). Touch the Change
Settings Contents to set to OFF, then press Previous Screen Button to return to the Memory Switch
Screen.
5. Press the down arrow 1 time to item #10 ATS/APS switch (Tray 2). Touch the Change Settings
Contents to set to OFF, then press Previous Screen Button to return to the Memory Switch Screen.
Contents to set to ON, then press Previous Screen Button to return to the Memory Switch Screen.
9. Power OFF/ON to perform copy operations.
DESCRIPTION: J14-3 while copying from Tray 4. SOLUTION ID: 73,912

SOLUTION: CAUSE: A bind with the Tray 4 paper feed drive system. One of the ADU black rubber stoppers USAGE: 3
has dislodged from the ADU and has wedged into the Tray 4 drive system.
SOLUTION: Remove the ADU rubber stopper from the Tray 4 drive system.
Notes:
1. The ADU has a total of 6 black rubber stoppers located between the guide plates on the right
side of the ADU.
2. Refer to the 7060 Parts Catalog (1/98), pages 70 to 73 for location and part numbers.
DESCRIPTION: When using Proof Copy Mode, with tandem level 14 EPROMs installed and sheet insertion SOLUTION ID: 90,782
selected, the machine makes only one set after releasing Proof Copy Mode, rather than
completing all the originally programmed remaining sets.
This problem is resolved by installing tandem level 10 EPROMs. However, enhancements

associated with level 14 EPROMs, such as the single layer screen are not available.
NSSG Web Support, including serial number and meter reading. These submissions will allow
proper tracking of field impact.
DESCRIPTION: Every other set has a smudge in the middle of every copy. SOLUTION ID: 53,062
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Dirty rollers. Smudges applied to paper by the pivoting motion of the finisher. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: Clean the rollers to resolve the problem.
DESCRIPTION: J72-65 while duplexing. SOLUTION ID: 90,163

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The ADU selector gate in the ADU paper exit/conveyance section is binding. The gate is USAGE: 3

51
7060
staying down allowing duplexed copies to be fed back into the ADU instead of exiting into the
finisher.
SOLUTION: Repair the bind to the ADU selector gate (p/n 25SA43070).
DESCRIPTION: 10mm void at the trail edge. SOLUTION ID: 84,326

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The upper and lower second paper feed rollers failed. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: Replace the upper paper second paper feed roller (p/n 55FA41060) and the lower
second paper feed roller (p/n 55FA41050).
DESCRIPTION: E47-5 prior to the completion of warm-up. SOLUTION ID: 81,119

SOLUTION: CAUSE: CN430 (5V DC supply for the image processing board) located on the image processing USAGE: 3
board, is not properly seated.
SOLUTION: To check CN430, perform the following:

2. Remove CN430 from the image processing board.
3. Ensure that all the pins for CN430 on the image processing board are straight and properly
aligned. Then inspect CN430 on the wiring harness. Ensure that all the wires are properly
attached to the connector.
4. Reseat CN430 on the image processing board.
DESCRIPTION: How to adjust lead edge erasure. SOLUTION ID: 80,922

SOLUTION: To adjust lead edge erasure, perform the following: USAGE: 3
3. Touch [2: Timing adjustment] on the touchscreen.
4. Touch [4: Lead edge timing adjustment] on the touchscreen.
5. Touch the [Copy Screen] key on the touchscreen, then make a copy and confirm the output.
6. Press the C key while pressing the P key.
7. Enter a value from the numerical keypad or the touchscreen, then touch the [SET] key, located
on the touchscreen. The adjustment range is 0 (small) to 99 (large).
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 until the lead edge erasure falls within the standard range (within
3mm).
DESCRIPTION: Unable to copy on to 8.5x11R SOLUTION ID: 80,571

SOLUTION: CAUSE: APS settings 7-4 and 7-5 in 25 mode were not set to the factory default settings. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: To set 7-4 and 7-5 to factory default settings in 25 mode, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode, (power the machine OFF, then, while holding down on the 2 and 5 keys,
2. Press the 1 button on the touchscreen for software switch setting.
3. Press the up/down arrows to increment to software switch 7-4 (Platen APS B5R/A5 switchover).
4. Press the OFF button to change the data to 0.
5. Press the up/down arrows to increment to software switch 7-5 (Platen APS 8.5x11 switchover).
7. Previous screen button on the touchscreen to return to the memory setting mode.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, original stop position adjustment. SOLUTION ID: 78,801

SOLUTION: To adjust the original stop position, perform the following: USAGE: 3
1. Access the 36 mode (power the copier ON while pressing the 3 and 6 keys).
2. Press [2: Timing Adjustment].
3. Press [8: Original Position Adjustment].
4. Press [Copy Screen].
5. Select copy mode 1:1 and 11x17 paper.
6. Place an 11x17 piece of paper with an arrow drawn on the lead edge into the RADF.
7. Press the Start Print button.
8. If the paper feed timing does not conform to the standard (ñ1mm), press the C key while
pressing the P key.
9. Press [Next Adjustment], select 1:1, and enter a value (-99 to 99; 1 step = 0.47mm and press
[Set].
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the paper feed timing is within specification.
11. Repeat the above process using 2:2 with 11x17, 8.5x11, and 8.5x11R paper sizes.

52
7060
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, intermittently when sorting 2:2, jam position 13 is indicated and paper has jammed SOLUTION ID: 70,654
into the lower stopper pads (p/n 048645260), which hold the paper during the shift operation.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The roller shift position is not adjusted properly, which results in the stopper pads USAGE: 3
obstructing the paper path.
SOLUTION: To adjust the stopper pads to the maximum open position, perform the following:
1. Power the copier OFF/ON/OFF.
2. Remove the upper cover from the finisher.
3. With the shift unit toward the front of the finisher (home position), check that the roller home
position sensor actuator lines up with the shift unit installation notch.
4. Loosen the roller shift home position sensor (PS18) bracket screws; then, adjust the position of
the bracket.
Note: A good physical reference is to ensure that the slide arm (p/n 12QR46110) is perfectly
parallel with the finisher in the front-to-rear direction. A change in position of several gear teeth,
has a significant effect on the position of the stopper pads.
DESCRIPTION: E22-1 during warm-up mode. SOLUTION ID: 70,329

SOLUTION: CAUSE: M7 (charge corona cleaning motor) failed. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: To check M7, perform the following:

1. Access the 47 mode (power the machine OFF, then, while holding down on the 4 and 7 keys,
power the machine ON), output code 046.
2. Press the Print button and wait for FIN to appear on the control panel screen.
3. If a jam code appears or FIN does not appear, clean or replace M7 (p/n 25SA80040).
DESCRIPTION: Can ECM passcode be enabled for Interrupt mode copies? SOLUTION ID: 70,262
SOLUTION: Currently, this option is unavailable. USAGE: 3
Copies made from Interrupt mode will be counted onto the individual ECM passcode copy counter
that was Interrupted.
Example: A customer enters their ECM passcode and begins a 100 page copy job, another
customer selects Interrupt mode and makes 10 copies, the passcode total copy counter will include
the interrupt mode copies. (100 + 10 =110).
DESCRIPTION: DF306, the originals exit the RADF excessively fast causing the originals to become out of SOLUTION ID: 70,101
order.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The RADF CB and/or the RADF main motor (M301) have failed. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: Replace the RADF CB (p/n 12ER-9014) and the RADF main motor M301 (p/n
12ER80011).
DESCRIPTION: When the interrupt key is pressed, the interrupt indicator light flashes, but the copier does SOLUTION ID: 69,728
not stop printing until the original copy job is completed.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This is normal operation when group mode is selected as the default output mode. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: To change the default output mode, perform the following:

2. Enter the Key Operator Mode (power the copier ON, while holding the HELP key).
3. Touch [1. INITIAL SETTINGS] on the LCD.
4. Touch [5. OUTPUT] on the LCD.
5. Touch the sort icon, which is the top icon displayed on the LCD so that it is highlighted.
6. If neither sort or group is desired as a default output, verify that all three icons are not
highlighted.
DESCRIPTION: Can NCR PAPER* be used as copy paper in the 7060? SOLUTION ID: 67,911
SOLUTION: Konica recommends an NCR PAPER named [[Xero/Form* II| URL USAGE: 3
http://www.appletonpapers.com/webapp/wcs/stores/servlet/sheetsxeroformiifeatures?currentCateg
ory=149094&langId=-1&catalogId=239327&storeId=139327]] from a company called Appleton
Papers in Wisconsin. Xero/Form II is a vegetable-based product that works extremely well. It is
available through Xpedx paper distributors nationwide.

53
7060
DESCRIPTION: Hardware and software total counters do not match. SOLUTION ID: 66,772
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This problem would only appear if level 15 (or higher) EPROMs are not installed and 25 USAGE: 3
mode software switch 1-1 is set to a 1. This switch controls how the total counters count for 11x17
paper. If set to 1, both software and hardware total counters would increment by 2 counts. The
firmware would only allow the hardware total counter to count twice.
SOLUTION: Install the most current level EPROMs available. The correction allows the hardware
and software total counters to count twice with 11x17 paper when 25 mode software switch 1-1 is
set to 1. The default for 1-1 is 0.
Notes:
1. This correction was introduced with level 15 EPROMs (see [[7060 Technical Bulletin #14|
IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc116.bmp SCROLL]]).
2. All other counters will always increment once (i.e., pm counter, drum counter, etc.).
3. As of 4/20/99 the most current EPROM level is 18 (see [[7060 Technical Bulletin #21| IMAGE
V:\bitmaps\cjc117.bmp SCROLL]]).
4. The customer must be informed if the 2-count option is enabled in 25 mode.
DESCRIPTION: Auto tray switching (ATS) is occurring from a paper tray, with ATS/APS disabled, to another SOLUTION ID: 66,596
paper tray with the same size paper.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This is normal operation of ATS/APS. Disabling ATS/APS on a particular tray removes USAGE: 3
that tray from the machines options when another tray with the same size paper runs out.
However, if the tray with ATS/APS disabled is chosen as the initial tray to feed paper, and it runs
out during the job, the machine will automatically look for another tray with the same size paper and
ATS/APS enabled.
SOLUTION: If this is a problem, the only solution is to disable ATS by performing the following
procedure:
1. Access the key operator mode.
2. Select Memory Switches.
3. Select option 6 (Automatic Tray Switching).
4. Press Change Setting Contents until Off is displayed.
DESCRIPTION: How to program the paper size for Tray 2, Tray 3, and Tray 4. SOLUTION ID: 66,431
SOLUTION: To program the paper size for Trays 2, 3, and 4, perform the following: USAGE: 3
2. Hold down the 2 and 5 keys, and power the machine ON.
3. Press 2 on the touch screen for paper size setting.
4. Press the tray on the touch screen that is to be programmed.
5. Use the up down arrows to select the size of the paper that will be in the tray.
6. Press the previous screen button on the touch screen to save the settings into memory, and to
return to the memory setting mode window.
DESCRIPTION: The 7060 locks up when using the INTERRUPT button during a print job. SOLUTION ID: 65,302
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The lock up occurs with the 7060 version 18.0 EPROMs in a network printer environment, USAGE: 3
during the following conditions:
1. Several print jobs are queued into the unit and printing begins.
2. During processing of a print job, the INTERRUPT button is depressed.
3. The print job in progress is completed and the unit enters copier/interrupt mode.
4. The interrupt copy job is completed and:
a. If the operator does nothing and walks away, the copier times out, returns to printer mode and
completes the jobs remaining in queue.
b. If the operator depresses the INTERRUPT button to release the mode, the unit locks up. The
jobs remain in queue until the unit is power cycled, at which time they print out.
SOLUTION: The issue is currently under investigation. A fix will be released as soon as possible.
Until a correction is received, operators should be advised to allow the Interrupt mode to
automatically time out to restore printer operation.
Note: This issue does not appear in 7150 version 14.0 EPROMs.

54
7060
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, with Equitrac* devices, do you have to log in on both copier to get a correct SOLUTION ID: 64,793
count for that client number?
SOLUTION: The Equitrac external copy monitor must be installed on each of the tandem copiers. This system USAGE: 3
operates from the total counter system in the main body, and cannot identify copies made on the
secondary copier unless a second unit is installed. With the second unit installed, it will be
necessary to log in to both units.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, front sponge exit roller is being damaged by paper in the exit tray. SOLUTION ID: 63,656
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The finisher firmware has been updated to change stack height detection from the center USAGE: 3
actuator to the front actuator position. This prevents the stapled edge of exiting copies from
rubbing on the roller.
SOLUTION: Update the finisher CB, IC5 to level 14 EPROMs (p/n FS103AA05-14.0). The
firmware can also be downloaded from the Konica Bulletin Board System (KBBS).
See [[FS103/FS103A Technical Bulletin #6| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc098.bmp SCROLL]] for more
information.
DESCRIPTION: Envelopes will not feed. SOLUTION ID: 62,630

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Envelopes are not within the paper specification for the 7060. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: The 7060 was not designed to run envelopes.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, marks on offset copies at the trail edge. SOLUTION ID: 62,124
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Shift roller assembly is set too tight. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: Adjust SD3 grip solenoid (p/n 12QR-2630). See page 31 in the FS103 Service
Manual.
DESCRIPTION: Does ECM have to be disabled for a 7060 printer? SOLUTION ID: 61,597
SOLUTION: ECM does not have to be disabled. Print jobs can not be counted by ECM passcodes. USAGE: 3
DESCRIPTION: How to increase fixing unit temperature. SOLUTION ID: 61,061

SOLUTION: To increase the fixing unit temperature, perform the following: USAGE: 3
1. Press the application key.
2. Press the thick paper icon on the LCD.
3. Press OK twice.
4. Insert thick paper or card stock into the bypass tray.
5. Place an original on the platen glass.
6. Enter the number of desired copies and press the start/print key.
Note: When selecting thick paper mode, the fixing temperature is increased and the linear speed
decreased to improve fixing performance.
DESCRIPTION: How to set paper tray default. SOLUTION ID: 60,472

SOLUTION: The tray selection preference when APS is canceled must be adjusted. USAGE: 3
Enter the 25 mode, select item #1 Software Switch Setting. DIPSW 8-4, 8-5, 8-6 will determine the
default tray chosen.
Mode 8-6 8-5 8-4
No preference 0 0 0
Tray 1 0 0 1
Tray 2 0 1 0
Tray 3 0 1 1
Tray 4 1 0 0
Tray 5 1 0 1
DESCRIPTION: Noise from the fixing unit. SOLUTION ID: 59,871

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Noise caused by fixing shaft holder, heat sleeves and release levers. USAGE: 3
SOLUTION: The fixing shaft holder (p/n 25BA 76030) and heat sleeves on each side of the lower
fixing roller have been replaced by a new part. The release levers (front p/n 55FA53051 and rear

55
7060
p/n 55FA53061) have also been changed.
See [[7060 Parts Information Bulletin #92| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJC089.bmp SCROLL]] for more
information.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, PLEASE CLOSE FINISHER DOOR message at power up. SOLUTION ID: 58,469
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A loss of 24V DC to the finisher control board. The 24V DC comes from the copier DC USAGE: 3
power supply CN28-6, and goes through MS1 of the finisher to CN9-1 of the finisher control board.
SOLUTION: If 24V DC is present at CN28-6 on the copier DC power supply, but not present at
CN9-1 of the finisher, check MS1 and all of the connectors between CN28-6 to CN9-1.
DESCRIPTION: When using book copy mode, second half of the print is shifted off of the page. SOLUTION ID: 58,413
SOLUTION: CAUSE: In order for the page not to shift, frame erasure needs to be pressed first and set to 1mm, USAGE: 3
then press book copy.
SOLUTION: Select frame erasure to keep the page from being shifted.
DESCRIPTION: How to install new staple cartridges. SOLUTION ID: 57,558

SOLUTION: To install new staple cartridges, perform the following: USAGE: 3
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Remove the staple cartridge by pulling it upward.
3. Press the green release button on the staple cartridge and remove the empty staple cartridge.
4. Firmly insert the new cartridge case into the staple cartridge by aligning the arrow sides of both
case and cartridge.
5. Remove the holder tape holding staples in place.
6. Insert the staple cartridge and push in.
7. Close the finisher door.
Note: This information can also be found on page 11-7 of the User's Manual.
DESCRIPTION: Can the machine do book copy and pull cover sheets from the bypass tray at the same time? SOLUTION ID: 55,694
SOLUTION: The machine cannot perform that type of operation. USAGE: 3
DESCRIPTION: Can non-image area erase be the default when the RADF is opened? SOLUTION ID: 55,112
SOLUTION: This default is not available. However, the job can be stored into job memory so the settings will be USAGE: 3
set once then the job can be recalled.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, cannot select the RADF. SOLUTION ID: 53,307

CAUSE: PS45 APS timing sensor and/or PS308 ADF open/close interlock are not being flagged.
SOLUTION: To verify if PS45 is operating properly, ensure APS from the glass is ON, place an
11x17 original on the platen glass. Depress the tall actuator (PS45), if 11x17 is selected then
PS45 (p/n540085510) is good.
To verify if PS308 (p/n 12QV85510) is operating properly, use the 47 multimode, input code 060,
press P-01-P. Close the RADF, note the change in state on the operation panel (OFF should be
displayed if actuated). If not, check the right rear RADF hinge for the black actuator (p/n
12VR10100), it may be broken off.
DESCRIPTION: Can warm-up temperature be increased for heavy stock? SOLUTION ID: 52,914
SOLUTION: Warm-up temperature is set at 392*F and it is not adjustable. USAGE: 3
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, what type of cable comes with the kit and how long is it? SOLUTION ID: 52,857
SOLUTION: The cable that comes with the tandem kit is a SCSI-2 cable, and is 17 feet long. Konica only USAGE: 3
recommends using the cable that is included in the tandem copy kit.
DESCRIPTION: How to scan a job into memory while another job is printing/copying (Reserve feature). SOLUTION ID: 52,838
SOLUTION: The Reserve feature allows one additional copy job to be scanned into memory while a print or USAGE: 3
copy job is in progress. When the current job is completed, the reserved job is automatically

56
7060
performed.
To use the Reserve feature, perform the following:
1. Press the Reserve button on the touch screen when button is active (not grayed out or filled in).
2. Insert the original(s) into the document feeder or onto the platen glass.
3. Select the job parameters.
4. Press Start/Print.
5. Job is scanned into memory.
Notes:
a. The Reserve button is not active (grayed out) unless a copy or print job is currently in
progress. If a job is in the Very High mode or Thick mode (Thin/Thick Paper) the reserve job
cannot be set.
b. Status button can be selected to view details of the original job and the reserve job.
c. The Status screen and some Reserve functionality are only available with minimum level 13.0
EPROMs ([[Latest EPROM level, 7060 | FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] and
[[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\newrom\7060.txt]]).
d. When using Platen memory, set the original(s) on the platen glass or RADF, then press [SET]
to store the image.
DESCRIPTION: Can the Interrupt feature be utilized during a print job? SOLUTION ID: 52,673
SOLUTION: While printing, the interrupt feature operates as follows: USAGE: 3
1. If interrupt is selected while the display says PRINTER RECEIVING DATA, it will allow copying
prior to printing the job.
2. If interrupt is selected when printing a single set, while the display says PRINT IN PROGRESS,
no action will take place and the print job will not be interrupted. If interrupt is selected when
printing multiple sets, while the display says PRINT IN PROGRESS, interrupt will stop the printer in
between sets to permit copy jobs.
3. Once the copy job is finished, let the interrupt feature time out and return automatically to
printing. If you manually try to release the interrupt feature, the printer may lock up after it
completes the print job. If this occurs, the IP unit may need to be reset by being powered OFF/ON.
Note: Status screen functionality is only available in level 13 and above EPROMs.
DESCRIPTION: How to perform the Dmax adjustment. SOLUTION ID: 52,500

SOLUTION: Note: The L-detect adjustment must be performed prior to adjusting Dmax. To set the L-detect, USAGE: 3
1. Access the 47 mode (power the copier on while press the 4 and 7 keys), output code 095.
2. After about 5 minutes, the OUT item display will change from NOW to FIN.
To adjust the Dmax, perform the following:

1. Access the 47 mode (power the copier ON while pressing the 4 and 7 keys), output code 018.
2. After 30 seconds FIN will display in the OUT item display.
DESCRIPTION: How to program density shift. SOLUTION ID: 52,431

SOLUTION: To program density shift, perform the following: USAGE: 3
Text/Photo - press P, then 5, select desired setting (0-5) standard is 3.
Text - press P, then 6, select desired setting

(0-5) standard is 3.
Photo - press P, then 7, select desired setting

(0-5) standard is 3.
Increase Contrast - press P, then 8, select desired setting (0-5) standard is 5.
DESCRIPTION: Flashing JAM on the status line of the LCD. SOLUTION ID: 52,416
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The EPROMs on the main CB are revision level 2.0. Minimum production version of USAGE: 3
EPROMs for the main CB should be revision level 12.0 on newer units.
SOLUTION: Upgrade the main CB EPROMs to the latest version.
57
7060

DESCRIPTION: Key Operator Memory Switch Programming information-definitions. SOLUTION ID: 51,814
SOLUTION: This mode is entered by holding the help (?) key and turning the machine ON. Select choice 9, USAGE: 3
memory switch, on the touch screen. Select the following 22 choices by using the arrows on the
touch screen.
(1) Auto reset timer - Sets the time interval until the machine resets to initial condition. The options
are off, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, or 300 seconds.
(2) Auto/reset key function - Sets the condition of copy mode, copy density, magnification, and
paper tray selection when the auto/reset key is pressed. The options are full-auto or initial settings
(initial settings are selected in this feature).
(3) RADF - original effect - Determines how the machine initializes when it is in the platen copy
(non-RADF) mode, and an original is inserted in the RADF feed tray. The two choices are RADF
selected, and RADF + AUTO/RESET key selected. The RADF selected option will activate the
RADF without resetting any other features. The RADF + AUTO/RESET key selected option will
activate the RADF and reset the machine to the features programmed in memory switch #2.
(4) Erasure outside area of original - Sets how the machine will determine the image area of the
copy. The two choices are Area outside original erased, and Erased for APS/AMS only. The Area
outside original erased option will limit the copy image area to that of the original. The Erased for
APS/AMS only option will limit the copy image area to that of the copy paper size and magnification
automatically selected by the machine.
(5) RADF frame erasure selection - Sets the amount of frame erase when using the RADF to
None, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, or 5mm.
(6) Automatic tray switching - If this feature is on and the machine has multiple paper trays loaded
with the same size paper, it will automatically start feeding from another tray when the initial tray
runs out of paper during a copy job. Refer to memory switches 9 through 13 to activate this feature
for each tray.
(7) Platen APS - This feature allows the machine to detect the size of the original placed on the
glass and choose the same size copy paper. Refer to switches 9 through 13 to activate this feature
for each tray.
(8) RADF APS - This feature allows the machine to detect the size of the original fed through the
RADF. Refer to switches 9 through 13 to activate this feature for each tray.
(9) ATS/APS switch (Tray 1) - Activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for tray 1.
(14) Platen AMS - This feature allows the machine to automatically select the proper
magnification ratio when copy paper size is manually selected, and an original is placed on the
platen glass.
(15) RADF AMS - This feature allows the machine to automatically select the proper magnification
ratio when copy paper size is manually selected, and an original is fed from the RADF.
(16) Staple mode reset-function - When copying in the sort/staple mode, the machine will
automatically reset to non-staple mode when the job in progress is completed.
(17) Key click sound - Activates the buzzer sound when the touch sensitive screen is touched, or
any of the keys are pressed. This confirms the machine recognition of a selection.
(18) Job memory auto recall function - This allows the machine to initialize using selections stored
in job memory #15 when the power is turned on or the Auto/Reset button is pressed.
(19) Tray setting: sheet insertion - Allows selection of tray 1 or tray 3 as the source of the inserted
sheets.
(20) 5.5 X 8.5 size original type - Selects orientation of 5.5 X 8.5 originals. The choices are

58
7060
landscape or portrait.
(21) Rotation - When turned on, it allows the machine to automatically rotate an 8.5 X 11 original
image to match the manually selected paper size. For example; if an original is placed in the
RADF, or on the platen glass, in the 8.5 X 11R position and 8.5 X 11 paper size is selected, the
machine will rotate the image to fit the 8.5 X 11 paper.
(22) 1 SHOT indication time - Determines the duration of informational messages that are
displayed (I.E. 50 SHEETS MAXIMUM IN STAPLE MODE). The options are 3 or 5 seconds.
LIST OF ACRONYMS USED IN KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMMING
RADF - Reversing Automatic Document Feeder

APS - Automatic Paper Select
AMS - Automatic Magnification Select
ATS - Automatic Tray Switching
DESCRIPTION: Is the tandem copier feature available using a 7060 and a FORCE 60? SOLUTION ID: 69,168
SOLUTION: The FORCE 60 can not be used with a 7060 for tandem copying. USAGE: 3
DESCRIPTION: DF310, J62 and multifeeding after performing the modifications to the paper feed system in SOLUTION ID: 133,735
the RADF.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The reverse gear and torque limiter failed. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace the reverse gear (p/n 12VR77060) and torque limiter (p/n 12ER40362).
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent J13-2 when feeding from Tray 3. SOLUTION ID: 124,569
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The Paper feed lift up spring on SD141 (LCT paper feed SD [1000]) is too tight causing USAGE: 2
the Paper feed swivel plate to bind resulting in no paper feed from Tray 3.
SOLUTION: To reduce the spring tension form the mounting bracket for the Paper feed lift up
spring toward SD141 (LCT paper feed SD [1000]).
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, J72-66 occurs during copy mode. SOLUTION ID: 118,264
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The conveyance motor M1 in the FS103B failed. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: To check the conveyance motor M1, perform the following.

1. Access the 47 multi mode (power the machine ON while holding down on the 4 and 7 keys)
2. Press the PRINT button. The FS103B conveyance motor M1 should come ON.
3. If the FS103 conveyance motor M1 (p/n 122H80040) does not come ON, replace it.
4. Power the machine OFF/ON to exit the 47 multimode.
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, J72-66 during operation. SOLUTION ID: 117,995

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Return spring for SD2 (p/n 12QR-2630) (printer exit solenoid) is broken. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace the return spring (p/n 12QR45700)
DESCRIPTION: LT351, part number for the large capacity tray mounting screw, which attaches the LCT SOLUTION ID: 116,845
bottom plate (p/n 12UM10010) to the machine main body.
SOLUTION: The large capacity tray mounting screw can be obtained by ordering p/n 00Z145082. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, J72-66 when duplexing. SOLUTION ID: 113,155

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The spring on the SD152 (ADU gate) has become dislodged from the lift arm assembly, USAGE: 2
resulting in the lift arm assembly being positioned above the inversion guide plate when the left
side door of the copier is closed. This causes the first side copy to exit into the FS103A, instead of
going down into the ADU for second side copying.
SOLUTION: Reattach the spring to the SD152 (ADU gate) lift arm assembly and ensure that when
the left side door of the copier is closed that the lift arm is positioned under the inversion guide
plate. Perform the following to ensure that SD152 (ADU gate) is working properly:
1. Open the front door of the copier and remove the fuser unit.
2. Use the Door switch jig (p/n 00M6-2-00) to actuate MS2 and MS3 (door interlock).

59
7060
3. Access the 47 multimode (power the copier ON while pressing the 4 and 7 keys), output code
084 P-4-P.
4. Press START PRINT button.
5. Ensure that the inversion guide plate is moving up/down.
6. Reinstall the fuser unit, remove the Door switch jig and close the copier front door.
7. Power the copier OFF/ON to return to normal copy mode.
DESCRIPTION: Wavy lines in the center of the copy in the lead-to-trail direction. SOLUTION ID: 115,060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Mechanical binding of the optics scanning unit. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Thoroughly clean the optics rail, slide and pulleys. Apply a light lubrication of all
moving components.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, J72-02 displayed at power up. SOLUTION ID: 109,452

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The actuator for the stacker conveyance sensor (PS5) is binding, resulting in a false jam USAGE: 2
signal.
SOLUTION: To verify the operation of the stacker conveyance sensor, perform the following:
2. Access the 47 mode (power the copier ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys), output code 75,
press the START/PRINT key, followed by the STOP/CLEAR key.
3. Input code 076, press P-04-P. The state of the stacker conveyance sensor will be displayed in
the dark blue band at the top of the touchscreen, an indication of [LO] will be displayed when the
stacker conveyance sensor is not flagged, while an indication of [HI] will be displayed when the
stacker conveyance sensor is flagged.
4. Repair or replace the stacker conveyance sensor assembly (p/n 12AR-4570) as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: J94 while duplexing. SOLUTION ID: 108,908

SOLUTION: CAUSE: In the ADU, Conveyance PS spring (p/n 25SA50410) is bent down too far and not making USAGE: 2
contact with Conveyance guide plate (lower) p/n 55FA50030 when it is in the closed position. The
lack of contact between the PS spring and the conveyance guide plate results in Conveyance
guide plate (B) p/n 25SA50081 to not apply enough pressure to ADU conveyance roller (B) p/n
25SA50130 which will cause the paper to feed too far across the bottom of the ADU.
SOLUTION: Reform Conveyance PS spring up so that it contacts Conveyance guide plate (lower)
when it is in the closed position.
DESCRIPTION: Spots on copies/background. SOLUTION ID: 108,906

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The recycle toner auger is binding, resulting in toner dropping onto the copies. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Inspect the recycle toner auger for binding and clean as necessary. Inspect the toner
cartridge to ensure that there is not any other manufacturer name on the label other than Konica
(i.e. Kaytun*).
DESCRIPTION: LT351, 17-05 occurs when duplexing and using the LT351. SOLUTION ID: 107,267
SOLUTION: CAUSE: M801 (up/down plate drive motor) has failed. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: To check the motor, add paper and remove paper, and listen to the lift motor for
unusual noise, and see if there is any binding when the tray goes up and down. If there is any
problem with noise or binding, replace M801 (p/n460080031) as needed.
DESCRIPTION: White line running lead-to-trail, one inch from rear. SOLUTION ID: 105,539
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Laser path to the drum is obstructed. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Remove drum and clean opening of the laser path to the drum.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, E77-17 when stapling. SOLUTION ID: 103,890

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failure of stapler unit. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Switch the front stapler with the rear stapler. Run a stapled set. If E77-17 occurs, the
wiring harness may be damaged from the stapler unit to the finisher CB. Repair as necessary. If
an E77-18 occurs, the stapler unit has failed and needs to be replaced (p/n 12QR52100).

60
7060
DESCRIPTION: Code F35-1 occurs intermittently. SOLUTION ID: 103,023

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The fuser lamps are weak. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace the fuser lamps L1 (p/n 55FE83030), L2 (p/n 55FE83040), and L3
(55FE83050).
Note: The normal replacement is 900,000 copies.
DESCRIPTION: No power. Circuit breaker opens at power up. SOLUTION ID: 99,613
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Loose hardware is shorting the fixing lamp to ground. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Remove the cause of the short and inspect unit for damage. Reset the circuit breaker
and verify proper operation.
DESCRIPTION: Developer spew after performing PM. SOLUTION ID: 97,909

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The spring holding the charge grid in place is contacting the drum. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Reinstall the charge grid spring in the proper position and verify correct operation.
DESCRIPTION: J30 or J31 while copying. SOLUTION ID: 96,646

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The front and rear resist conveyance mylar sheets, in the second paper feed unit, are USAGE: 2
worn.
SOLUTION: Replace the resist conveyance mylar sheets, front (p/n 25SA41251) and/or rear (p/n
25SA41270), as needed.
Note: Be sure the ends of the mylar sheets are tucked under the lower paper feed resist plate (p/n
25SA41031).
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, message PLEASE OPEN FINISHER DOOR AND REPLACE STAPLES. SOLUTION ID: 96,026
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Staple sensing sensor PS14 or PS16 is faulty. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: To verify the operation of PS14 and PS16 perform the following:
1. Verify that both staple cartridges are loaded with staples and they are correctly seated in the
stapler units.
2. Remove rear cover of the finisher.
3. Power ON the copier.
4. Check the voltages on the finisher main CB at CN6 pins A10 and B1.
5. If there is a low present at pin A10 the rear stapler unit (p/n 12QR52100) will have to be
replaced.
6. If there is a low present at pin B1 the front stapler unit (p/n 12QR52100) will have to be
replaced.
Note: There are not any serviceable items in the stapler unit.
DESCRIPTION: LT352, grinding noise from the rear of the unit. SOLUTION ID: 95,165
1. Lack of lubrication on LCT gears. Lubricate gears as needed.
2. The elevation worm gear is worn (gear attached to the motor). Replace the elevation worm gear
(p/n 12UM77010) as needed.
DESCRIPTION: Auto layout is not centering image all the time. SOLUTION ID: 93,291
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Miscommunication of data between the image processing CB and the writer unit. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Reseat the connectors on image processing CB and the write unit. If problem
persists, replace the image processing CB (p/n 55FA-9500).
DESCRIPTION: Can all the EPROMs be installed except the ones in the image processing board and not SOLUTION ID: 56,441
have any effect on the machine?
SOLUTION: The EPROMs in the image processing board produce the image. Without the correct EPROMs USAGE: 2
installed, copy quality problems can result.

61
7060

DESCRIPTION: Number of individual passcodes available in the ECM mode. SOLUTION ID: 53,532
SOLUTION: The ECM can be programmed with 256 different passcodes, from 00000-99999. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: The bypass width detection is not detecting the proper size paper. SOLUTION ID: 52,708
SOLUTION: CAUSE: VR1, located in the manual bypass has failed. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: With the machine turned ON, check the voltage at CN144-3 on the main CB.
1. With 5.5x 8.5 paper inserted in the bypass approximately 3.9V DC should be measured.
2. With 8.5x11R paper inserted in the bypass approximately 1.9V DC should be measured.
3. With 11x17 paper inserted in the bypass approximately 0V DC should be measured.
If these readings are not observed replace VR1 (p/n 5040-8810).
DESCRIPTION: When scanning a job in copier, unable to scan the full job. SOLUTION ID: 73,719
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Error diffusion processing is set incorrectly. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Refer to software SW settings 9-4 and 9-5 Normal/Fine selection factory default is
1ED + 2ED 9-4, 9-5 both set to 0.
Note: 4ED selection uses more memory to store a job. See the 7060 service manual, page 6-4 and
6-7.
DESCRIPTION: F28-1 code intermittently. SOLUTION ID: 92,899

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Main charge corona power supply (HV1) is intermittently shorting out. Using the 36 USAGE: 2
running mode with out paper and unplugging HV1 should aid in isolating the failed HV1.
SOLUTION: Replace HV1 (p/n 55FA84010) as needed.
DESCRIPTION: J17-06 with the paper folded at the second feed rollers. SOLUTION ID: 89,846
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A worn actuator on the registration photosensor (PS14). USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace the actuator (p/n 25SA41201).
DESCRIPTION: Washed out copies. SOLUTION ID: 87,813

SOLUTION: CAUSE: HV2 (T/S power supply) failed. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace HV2 (p/n 25SA84024).
DESCRIPTION: F41-2 code during copy mode. SOLUTION ID: 84,320

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The standard data was not set in the 36 mode. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: To set the standard data in the 36 mode, perform the following:
1. Access the 36 mode (power the machine ON while holding down on the 3 and 6 keys.
2. Press [2] Timing adjustments.
3. Press [9] Recall standard data.
4. Select All timing adjustments.
5. Press YES.
6. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end this recovery mode.
DESCRIPTION: J17-6 occurring when feeding from all trays intermittently. SOLUTION ID: 83,109
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Paper feed motor (M140) has failed. Verify the operation of M140 using the 47 USAGE: 2
multimode, output code 021, press P-03-P.
SOLUTION: Replace M140 (p/n 55FA-1820) as needed.

Notes:
1. Inspect complete paper feed drive system for any binding and repair as necessary, including
paper feed idler gears (p/n 25SA77410) item 16 in the parts catalog, the e clip may have fallen off
or the gear maybe damaged.
2. Inspect LCT clutch 1 (p/n 55FA82310) item 21 in parts catalog, verify using the 47 mode code
022,multimode output press P-03-P, the clutch should not turn freely.

62
7060
DESCRIPTION: PLEASE INSERT KEY COUNTER message after installing a new main CB. SOLUTION ID: 82,702
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Poorly seated key counter interface connection (CN35-2 on the main CB), which results USAGE: 2
in the C (K) joint signal detecting an open condition.
SOLUTION: To check CN35-2 on the main CB, perform the following:

2. Remove CN35 from the main CB.
3. Ensure that all the pins for CN35 on the main CB are straight and properly aligned, then inspect
CN35 on the wiring harness. Ensure that all the wires are properly attached to the connector.
4. Reseat CN35 on the main CB.
DESCRIPTION: In 2:2 mode the second side is lighter. SOLUTION ID: 81,968
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The transfer current is too low. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: To change the transfer current, perform the following:

1. Access the 36 mode (power the machine OFF, then, while holding down the 3 and 6 keys,
2. Select 2 High voltage auto adjustment.
3. Press the down arrow until Transfer appears.
4. Record the number that appears.
5. Increase the current using the key pad.
6. Check the copies in 2:2 mode, perform adjustment as needed to correct problem.
7. Power the machine OFF to exit the 36 mode.

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The charge corona has failed. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace the charge corona (p/n 55FA-2500).
DESCRIPTION: The machine does not indicate ADD TONER. SOLUTION ID: 77,514
SOLUTION: CAUSE: An incorrect TLD sensor is installed. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Confirm that the correct TLD is installed. The part number for the correct TLD is
540088030.
DESCRIPTION: The last inch on the trail edge of the copy paper is wavy or S-shaped. SOLUTION ID: 75,776
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The upper paper feed unit intermediate conveyance clutch MC9 is binding. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace MC9 (p/n 25SA82020).
DESCRIPTION: How to set up Booklet mode. SOLUTION ID: 75,319

SOLUTION: 1. Load 11x17 or 8.5x11R copy paper in a tray. USAGE: 2
2. Press APPLICATION to display the Application Selection Screen.
3. Touch Booklet.
4. Select additional copying features, as desired. When using the Reduce & Shift mode of the
Image shift, make the binding area in the center of copies.
5. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
6. Select the copy mode.
a. Touch COPY MODE to display the Copy Mode Screen.
b. Select 1:2 or 2:2.
c. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7. AMS is selected automatically.
Note: When selecting any tray other than the tray that is set and displayed on the Basic Screen,
touch COPY SIZE. Select desired tray key in the Paper Tray Selection Screen, Then Touch OK.
To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select copy size.
8. Enter the desired print quantity.
9. Position letter-size originals FACE DOWN in vertical direction onto the document feeder. When
using Platen memory with the Platen Glass, position original(s) on the platen glass and press SET
to scan. See p. 6-26. When using Platen memory with the RADF, position original(s) in the
document feeder.
Note: Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then
touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-31 to p. 6-32.
10. Press START PRINT.
11. After copying is completed, touch Booklet on the Application Selection Screen or press AUTO

63
7060
RESET to release the mode and reset the machine.
DESCRIPTION: Code 52-4 during copy mode, and the FM2 (optics cooling fan) is running. SOLUTION ID: 73,596
SOLUTION: CAUSE: One of the charge control springs was not connected. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Connect the charge control spring (p/n 25SA25110) to the charge control plate (p/n
25SA2508).
DESCRIPTION: Black copies. Test patterns in 36 mode print. SOLUTION ID: 72,754
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed CCD unit. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace the CCD (p/n 55FA-6400).
DESCRIPTION: LT351, jam position 6 when duplexing. Five copies remain in the ADU. SOLUTION ID: 72,628
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed LT351 paper feed clutch (MC800). USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace MC800 (p/n 55FA82320).
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent jams when feeding from Tray 3. SOLUTION ID: 72,392
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL2). USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Clean or replace CL2 (p/n 55FA82310) as necessary.

Note: Thoroughly, clean and inspect all bushings, bearings, gears, and drive shafts associated
with any clutch prior to its replacement. Drive system binds can cause clutch slippage and produce
clutch slippage.
DESCRIPTION: Part number for the DALLAS chip or NOVRAM. SOLUTION ID: 71,885
SOLUTION: NOVRAM (p/n DALLAS). USAGE: 2
Note: The models 7060 has two (2) NOVRAM positions. Ensure that this part (p/n DALLAS) is
installed in the IC21 location. The part number for the NOVRAM at the IC24 location is not yet
available.
DESCRIPTION: Can the IP303 be used with the 7060? SOLUTION ID: 71,862
SOLUTION: The IP303 can only be used with the 7065 and, possibly, future products. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, SUB MACHINE HAS NO RESPONSE is displayed on the operation panel SOLUTION ID: 69,549
when selecting tandem mode.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect EPROMS were installed. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: A Tandem Copy kit (PCUA 950792) is required. Tandem EPROMs (level 10.0) are
supplied in the kit. Konica recommends upgrading to level 13.0, which includes the latest
enhancements and supports the FS-103B. In addition Tandem EPROM's are available through the
BBS at address 7060T-13.EXE and through the Parts Distribution Center as the following part
numbers:
Main CB
C1, IC22 (p/n 7060T122-13.0)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060T123-13.0)
Operation panel
O1, IC16 (p/n 7060T216-12.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060T217-12.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060T212-12.0)
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060T218-12.0)

I1, IC29 (p/n 7060B29-17.0)
I2, IC30 (p/n 7060B30-17.0)
DF310 RADF CB
IC7 (p/n DF31035-11.0)

64
7060
FS103A Main CB
IC5 (p/n FS103AA7-13.0)
The above list is the minimum recommended configuration.
Note: Tandem printing is now available with the IP302.

Updated on 2/12/99.
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, when making a single copy, the conveyance motor speeds up and continues to run SOLUTION ID: 69,332
after the copy is ejected.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Sort mode is selected as the default output mode. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: To change the default output mode to non sort, perform the following:
2. Enter the Key Operator Mode (power the copier ON, while holding the HELP key).
3. Touch [1. INITIAL SETTINGS] on the LCD.
4. Touch [5. OUTPUT] on the LCD.
5. Touch the sort icon, displayed on the bottom of the LCD.
DESCRIPTION: Does the special EPROMs level 16.2 have all the enhancements provided in level 18.0 SOLUTION ID: 68,464
EPROMs?
SOLUTION: The special EPROMs level 16.2 are based off of the level 16.0 EPROMS and do not contain the USAGE: 2
enhancements of level 18.0 EPROMs.
DESCRIPTION: How to rotate the second side image for 8.5x14 and 11x17 paper sizes requiring image SOLUTION ID: 68,101
placement in 1:2 duplex mode for short edge binding.
SOLUTION: New EPROMS are available which provide rotation of the second side image for 8.5x14 and 11x17 USAGE: 2
paper sizes for users requiring image placement in 1:2 duplex mode for short edge binding. Install
level 16.2 EPROMs.
Note: This firmware does not rotate 8.5x11R because that paper size can be manually repositioned
in the RADF tray.
New main CB EPROMs:

C1, IC22 (p/n 7060122-16.2)
C2, IC23 (p/n 7060123-16.2)
KBBS filename 7060-16C.EXE
These EPROMS must be used with following EPROMs:

I1, IC29 (p/n 7060B29-17.0)
I2, IC30 (p/n 7060B30-17.0)
Operation panel
O1, IC16 (p/n 7060216-14.0)
O2, IC17 (p/n 7060217-13.0)
O3, IC12 (p/n 7060212-13.0)
O4, IC18 (p/n 7060218-14.0)
In order to use these EPROMs, perform the following:

1. With the power OFF, hold down the HELP button and power ON to display the Help Menu.
2. In the Help Menu, select #9 (Memory Switch).
3. Use the Up/Down arrows in the menu to scroll to:
No. 4. Use the change contents box to set Area Outside Of Original Erased.
No. 20. Use the change contents box to set Portrait.
No. 21. Use the change contents box to set ON.
4. Turn the power OFF/ON to restore normal operation.
See [[7060/FORCE 60/7150 Technical Bulletin #22| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc119.bmp SCROLL]] for
more details.
DESCRIPTION: Jam position 6 while duplexing, intermittently. SOLUTION ID: 67,653

65
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL2). USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace CL2 (p/n 55FA82310).

Note: Thoroughly, clean and inspect all bushings, bearings, gears, and drive shafts associated
with any clutch prior to its replacement. Drive system binds can cause clutch slippage and produce
clutch slippage.
DESCRIPTION: FS103, unable to access the Input List checks using the 47 mode, input code 76. SOLUTION ID: 67,131
SOLUTION: CAUSE: If the exit tray is actuating the upper limit sensor the 47 mode, input code 76, test USAGE: 2
functions will not work.
SOLUTION: Enter the 47 mode, output code 75, P-23-P and press the Start Print button. This will
move the exit tray down, deactivating PS2 and allow the 47 Mode, input code 76, test functions to
operate. The state of PS2 can be verified at CN4-2 on the finisher CB to ground, 0V DC would
indicate it is not actuated, and the 47 mode, input code 76, test functions should work. 5V DC
would indicate it is actuated, and the 47 mode, input code 76, test functions will be locked out.
Note: There are several discrepancies in the list of the 47 mode, input code 76, function contained
in the 7060 service manual. An updated list of the test functions follows.
MULTI
MODE ITEM FUNCTION / DESCRIPTION
01 PS2 Tray Upper Limit sensor
02 PS3 Tray Lower Limit sensor
03 PS4 Finisher Entrance Passage sensor
04 PS5 Stacker Conveyance Passage sensor
05 PS6 Paper Exit sensor #1
06 PS7 Staple Paper Exit Upper Limit sensor
07 PS8 Alignment Plate Home Position sensor
08 PS9 Paper Exit Belt Home Position sensor
10 PS11 Stapler Movement Home Position sensor
11 PS12 Paper Exit Opening sensor
-- PS14 Rear Stapler Empty sensor (must be checked at CN6-A10 of the finisher CB, to
ground)
-- PS15 Rear Stapler Home Position sensor (must be checked at CN6-A11 of the finisher
CB, to ground)
-- PS16 Front Stapler Empty sensor (must be checked at CN6-B1 of the finisher CB, to
ground)
-- PS17 Front Stapler Home Position sensor (must be checked at CN6-B2 of the finisher
CB, to ground)
17 PS18 Roller Shift Home Position sensor
19 PS20 Stacker Empty sensor
20 PS21 Stapler Rotation (Vertical) Detection sensor
21 PS22 Stapler Rotation (Slanting) Detection sensor
22 MS1 Finisher Door Interlock
-- PS23 Paper Exit sensor #2 (must be checked at CN 11-2 on the finisher CB, to ground)
DESCRIPTION: Toner yield specification. SOLUTION ID: 66,819

SOLUTION: The engineering specification for toner yield is 26666 copies with 6% solid fill per toner cartridge. USAGE: 2

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Drum motor (M4) speed abnormality. CN124, connector for drum motor (M4), is not USAGE: 2
seated properly.
SOLUTION: Reseat CN124, which is a black connector located on the left side of the M4 mounting
bracket assembly just above the developer suction fan (FM30).
DESCRIPTION: Errors printing .pdf (Adobe Acrobat* files). SOLUTION ID: 63,890
SOLUTION: In the print dialog window select PostScript* level 1. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: What is the speed of the machine when sending a print job? SOLUTION ID: 63,643
SOLUTION: The speed of the machine depends on the modes selected, the amount of data sent, paper size, USAGE: 2
the size of the print job and the resolution that the job is being processed at.
66
7060
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, are there any limitations when the FS103B is configured with the 7060? SOLUTION ID: 63,612
SOLUTION: The FS103B is the only finisher available for the 7060. FS103B provides document printing (face USAGE: 2
up) and page printing (face down) in simplex mode only. Finishing is not available when page
printing. The FS103B supports 3 position stapling in document print mode only.
DESCRIPTION: Unable to adjust the grid voltage to specification. SOLUTION ID: 62,823
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The charging fixed spring (front) is not contacting the HV(1) output prong. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Reform or replace the charging fixed spring (p/n 25SA25050).
DESCRIPTION: DF310, skewed copies. SOLUTION ID: 62,413

CAUSE: The originals are not stopping at the correct location because the original stop position is
out of adjustment.
SOLUTION: Adjust the original stop position, by performing the following:

1. Access the 36 mode (power the machine OFF, press down on the 3 and 6 keys, then power the
machine ON).
2. Press 2; Timing adjustment.
3. Press 8; RADF original stop position adjustment.
4. Touch the (Copy Screen) key.
5. Select copy mode 1-1, then place 8.5x11 paper in a tray.
6. Check the paper feed timing, (Standard: Within 241ñ1mm).
7. If the paper feed timing does not conform to the standard, press the C button while pressing the
P button.
8. Using the NEXT ADJUSTMENT key, select One-sided original, then enter a value from the
numeric keypad and touch the SET key.
9. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the paper feed timing is within range.
DESCRIPTION: If the machine is powered OFF after the job starts to print, does the memory clear? SOLUTION ID: 62,050
SOLUTION: If the machine is powered OFF after the print job starts, everything in memory is erased. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: Mixed originals not printing on correct size paper. SOLUTION ID: 61,674
SOLUTION: The 7060 can print mixed originals provided stapling or duplex features are not selected and USAGE: 2
Autoselect is selected for the paper source. When printing to a 7060 with mixed originals, in the 25
mode, software switch 14-3 MUST be set to a 1. A mixed original print job is a print job that
consists of multiple page sizes within one print job. If switch 14-3 is not set to a 1, all pages in the
print job will most likely print out on one page size. The default setting for this switch is 0. This
issue is associated with level 16 EPROMs.
Note: Mixed original mode cannot be selected within the print driver. The Mixed Original feature
will be used automatically by the printer when multiple page selections are made within a single
document.
DESCRIPTION: Finisher compatibility, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 61,557

SOLUTION: The FS103A (PCUA 950779) or FS103B (PCUA 950805) is compatible with the 7060. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: DF310, unable to properly copy mixed originals. Only one paper size is copied. SOLUTION ID: 60,658
CAUSE: The Mixed Original mode is not selected.
SOLUTION: To enable the Mixed Original mode, perform for the following:
1. Press the APPLICATION button. It is located to the right of the touchscreen.
2. A variety of application functions are displayed on the touchscreen. Press Mixed Original.
3. Press OK.
4. Insert a copy job in the RADF original tray and press START/PRINT.
DESCRIPTION: How to change the PM start date. SOLUTION ID: 60,649

67
7060
SOLUTION: The PM start date is automatically reset to the current date when the PM count is reset. USAGE: 2
To perform a PM count reset, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode (power ON the machine while pressing the 2 and 5 keys simultaneously).
2. Select item 3 (PM count/cycle).
3. Select 1 (PM count reset).
4. Select YES.
DESCRIPTION: Displays metric paper sizes when feeding from the document feeder. SOLUTION ID: 59,194
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The destination switchover is set to Japan or Europe. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: To set the destination switchover to USA, perform the following:

1. Access the 25 mode (power the machine ON while holding down the 2 and 5 keys).
2. From the touchscreen, press 1 for Software switch setting.
3. Press the left up arrow to scroll to 4.
4. Press the right up arrow to scroll to 2.
5. Press the ON key.
6. Press the right up arrow to scroll to 3.
7. Press the OFF key.
8. Press the previous screen key.
9. Turn the copier OFF/ON to exit the 25 mode.
DESCRIPTION: Can 7060 memory be installed in a 7050? SOLUTION ID: 57,749

SOLUTION: 7060 32MB memory module MU-103 (PCUA 950781) can be installed in a 7050. USAGE: 2
Note: 7050 16 MB memory module MU-101 (PCUA 950760) and 32MB memory module MU-102
(PCUA 950761) cannot be installed in a 7060.
DESCRIPTION: If the printer is in low power mode, is it able to print when a job is sent? SOLUTION ID: 57,482
SOLUTION: The printer will "awaken" from the low power condition when a print job is received. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: Ordered a 7060 second feed clutch and received a 7050 second feed clutch p/n 25SA82010. SOLUTION ID: 56,158
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The 7060 second feed clutch has been changed to the 7050 second feed clutch. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Refer to [[7060 Technical Bulletin #4| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc168.bmp SCROLL]].
DESCRIPTION: Cannot select the staple mode when the bypass tray is used. SOLUTION ID: 55,350
SOLUTION: The bypass tray is designed for special paper (i.e. thick paper, transparencies, labels, etc.) that is USAGE: 2
unable to be loaded in one of the normal trays. The stapler is unable to staple these types of
special papers without risk of damage. As a result the stapler function is automatically disabled
when the bypass tray is selected.
DESCRIPTION: Are there problems printing out high resolution UPC (bar codes)? SOLUTION ID: 54,346
SOLUTION: There is no documentation verifying problems printing high resolution UPC. The application USAGE: 2
requires testing. Konica is not equipped with a bar code reader. Request the specific application
be tested at the branch/dealership.
DESCRIPTION: The printer is not initializing. The touchscreen and quantity displays are blank. SOLUTION ID: 54,228
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The 7060 was switched OFF/ON while the IP302 print controller is ON. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: For proper reboot, switch OFF both the 7060 and the IP302. With the PC powered
up, switch the IP302 back ON, then the 7060.
DESCRIPTION: LCT added, but cannot choose it. SOLUTION ID: 54,135
SOLUTION: Download the new 1.3.6 driver from the web site. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: Machine defaults to various special applications. SOLUTION ID: 54,104

SOLUTION: Job memory #15 needs to be cleared so normal operation can take place. Anything programmed USAGE: 2
into job memory #15 can be the machines default.

68
7060
DESCRIPTION: Trail edge is being cut off when copying from the platen or ADF. SOLUTION ID: 53,750
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Customer is attempting edge to edge copying. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Advised customer that the printer does not support edge to edge copying.
DESCRIPTION: Erratic operation after installing level 13 EPROMs. SOLUTION ID: 53,662
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Faulty EPROMS. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Install new set of EPROMS.
DESCRIPTION: Are 7060 and 7050 upper fuser rollers interchangeable? SOLUTION ID: 53,120
SOLUTION: The rollers are not interchangeable. The 7050 upper fuser roller is p/n 25SA53070, the 7060 upper USAGE: 2
fuser roller is p/n 55FA53191.
DESCRIPTION: Does the developer count get reset when the PM counter is reset? SOLUTION ID: 52,945
SOLUTION: No, the developer count is reset when the L-detection adjustment is done. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: Prints are enlarged when printing through Windows* NT workstation using the PostScript* SOLUTION ID: 52,924
driver.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Scaling setting in the Windows NT PostScript driver is not set to 100%. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Set Scaling to 100%.
DESCRIPTION: Skewing from tray 1. SOLUTION ID: 52,624

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Damaged jam removal door. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Replace the metal section of the jam removal door to solve the skewing problem,
DESCRIPTION: Is the drum carriage assembly available? SOLUTION ID: 52,356

SOLUTION: Yes, order (p/n 55FA-9900) to obtain a complete drum carriage assembly. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: The fuser shaft roller holder does not fit the release lever. Heat insulating sleeves have SOLUTION ID: 52,335
been abolished.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The first 20 machines manufactured contained two heat insulating sleeves. These were USAGE: 2
eliminated which necessitated other parts changes.
SOLUTION: The affected machines are s/n 55FE00001 through 55FE00020. These 20 machines
have the heat sleeves (p/n 55FA53120) installed in the fuser units. If the sleeves fail, the following
parts are required:
Fixing roller shaft holder-originally identified as (p/n 55FA75010) has been updated to:
(p/n 25BA76030) quantity of 2.
Release lever/Front-originally identified as (p/n 55FA53050), has been updated to:
(p/n 55FA53051) quantity of 1.
Release lever/Rear-originally identified as (p/n 55FA53060), has been updated to:
(p/n 55FA53061) quantity of 1.
Note: The fixing ring (p/n 00Z680203) has been abolished on the new style fuser units.
DESCRIPTION: Can machine be set to use thick paper mode through Tray 3? SOLUTION ID: 52,130
SOLUTION: The programming associated with this type of change would be extensive and defeat the purpose USAGE: 2
of thick paper mode as well as require hardware redesign.
DESCRIPTION: Unable to use very high mode with the document feeder. SOLUTION ID: 51,829
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Product limitation. The document feeder is not available in the very high mode. USAGE: 2

69
7060
SOLUTION: Very high mode can only be used in the platen mode.
Note: The information in 7060 user's manual page 6-34 is incorrect.
A user's guide correction request has been made as of 2/16/98.
DESCRIPTION: How to enlarge 2 sided 8.5x11R originals to 11x17. SOLUTION ID: 51,526
SOLUTION: To enlarge 2 sided 8.5x11R originals to 11x17, perform the following: USAGE: 2
Select RADF AMS and verify same on LCD.
DESCRIPTION: Will image rotation work with 11x17 paper? SOLUTION ID: 51,522
SOLUTION: No. Image rotation will only function with copy paper sizes 8.5x11, 8.5x11R and 5.5x8.5. USAGE: 2
DESCRIPTION: What is the dual access feature? SOLUTION ID: 51,459

SOLUTION: The dual access feature will allow a different job to be stored into memory while printing or copying USAGE: 2
another job.
Note: Only available with level 13 EPROMs.
DESCRIPTION: The paper feeds too far into the ADU. SOLUTION ID: 50,676
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The ADU paper exit photosensor (PS154) actuator is sticking or binding. USAGE: 2
SOLUTION: Check the photosensor for a burr on the actuator or a problem with the return spring
of the actuator. Repair or replace as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: How to enable the key click sound (audible beep when information is keyed into operation SOLUTION ID: 50,247
panel).
SOLUTION: To enable the key click or beep sound when the key pad is touch, perform the following: USAGE: 2
1. Enter the key operator mode by holding the HELP key and pushing the main switch ON.
2. Touch item #9 Memory Switches.
3. Use the UP/DOWN arrows to select memory switch #17 Key Click.
4. Select ON or OFF, select previous screen, power machine OFF, then back ON.
DESCRIPTION: How to adjust the front-to-rear zoning for each feed tray. SOLUTION ID: 70,569
SOLUTION: To adjust the front-to-rear zoning, perform the following: USAGE: 2
1. Access the 36 mode (power OFF the copier, hold 3 and 6 and power ON the copier).
2. Select 2. Timing Adjustment
3. Select 2. Centering Adjustment
4. Press the Next adjustment key and select the paper feed tray that is to be adjusted.
5. Enter a value from the numeric keypad, then touch the Set key. The input range is -32 to 32
with 00 the starting point.
Note: 1 step = 1 pixel.
Refer to page 6-15 in the 7060 Service Manual (9/97).
DESCRIPTION: J34-04 when copying dark or black originals in the 1:2 or 2:2 mode only. SOLUTION ID: 136,217
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Improper sensitivity reaction to dark originals by the reverse point sensor (PS301), which USAGE: 1
is located in the fusing unit and detects paper passage during entry into the reversal unit.
SOLUTION: Clean or replace the reverse point sensor (p/n 070085510) as necessary.
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by Ish Prieto, TML Enterprises, Inc.
DESCRIPTION: Ratcheting gear noise from the upper and lower paper feed units. SOLUTION ID: 136,077
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Friction between the new style LCT main drive shaft and drive shaft holder causes the USAGE: 1
new style LCT drive shaft outer diameter to decrease and the drive shaft holder inner diameter to
increase, which results in poor gear alignment and produces a ratcheting gear noise from the upper
or lower paper feed unit.
SOLUTION: Clean and lubricate the new style LCT main drive shaft and drive shaft holder.
Replace the new style LCT main drive shaft (p/n 55FA18052) and drive shaft holder (p/n
55FA75020) as necessary.

70
7060
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by Bill Brady, X-Tech Laser Printing Inc.
DESCRIPTION: 1:2 and 2:2 can not be selected (grayed out) when using the bypass tray. SOLUTION ID: 135,687
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The bypass tray is not compatible with the ADU. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Do not attempt to use the 1:2 or 2:2 mode with the bypass tray.
DESCRIPTION: Toner hopper positioning latch, which interfaces with the positioning catch, is broken off SOLUTION ID: 135,509
the toner hopper.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Operators are not properly aligning the toner hopper positioning latch with the positioning USAGE: 1
catch prior to pushing the toner hopper into position.
SOLUTION: Install the toner hopper latch repair kit (p/n U181-2010) onto the toner hopper. Refer
to [[Technical Bulletin #48| URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/7060_toner_mod.pdf]] for
further details and installation instructions.
Note: To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded
for free from the Adobe* Web site at: [[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html|
URL http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html]]
DESCRIPTION: Copies are reduced in the lead-to-trail direction. SOLUTION ID: 135,449
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Binding lower fuser roller bearings, causing the main motor (M1) rotation to slow slightly. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Replace the lower fuser roller bearings (25SA76030).
DESCRIPTION: F52-01 displayed after replacing the DCPS. SOLUTION ID: 135,395
SOLUTION: CAUSE: CN99 is not connected on the DCPS. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Reconnect CN99 on the DCPS.

Note: When facing the DCPS, CN99 will be located in the upper left corner.
DESCRIPTION: With ECM enabled, ENTER ECM PASSWORD message is displayed immediately after SOLUTION ID: 134,469
completing each copy job. The password must be entered before each new job is required.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Firmware bug. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Upgrade firmware to version level 21.8, and enter the desired Auto Reset Timer in the
Key Op mode. To enter the desired Auto Reset Timer, perform the following:
1. Access the key op mode (power the copier OFF/ON, while pressing the help button).
2. Select [9. Memory Switch].
3. No. 1 Auto Reset Timer will be displayed.
4. Press [Change Setting Contents], to select the desired Auto Reset Timer.
5. Press [Previous Screen] to set the value.
6. Power the copier OFF/ON.
Note: This version can be down loaded from the [[FTP EPROM site| URL
ftp://eproms:epromuser@ftp.konicabt.com/copyhigh/7060-21I.EXE]]. There is also [[PDF file| URL
ftp://eproms:epromuser@ftp.konicabt.com/copyhigh/7060-21I.pdf]] that details the changes in the
EPROMs.
DESCRIPTION: Varying magnification in the lead-to-trail direction, after drum replacement. SOLUTION ID: 133,094
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A Katun* or non-Konica drum was installed. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Replace the drum with a Konica drum (PCUA 950786).
DESCRIPTION: F34-1 occurs during copy mode. SOLUTION ID: 131,968

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The DCPS failed. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To check the DCPS, reset the fuser code and observe the fuser lamps during and
after warm-up. If the lamps stay on, the power supply failed. Replace the DCPS (p/n 55FA84510).
DESCRIPTION: Developer Spew. SOLUTION ID: 130,966

71
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The HV1 unit failed. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To check HV1, perform the following:

1. Access the 36 mode (power the machine ON while holding down on 3 and 6 keys)
4. HV adjustment (CHARGE) is indicated, and a number is also on the screen.
5. Using the numeric keypad select 1 and touch the [set] key.
7. Make a copy.
8. If the copy quality did not change, replace the HV1 unit (55FA84010).
DESCRIPTION: Letter size mixed original print jobs will not double side staple correctly when using the SOLUTION ID: 129,627
PCL* driver.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: IP304 system software requires updating. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Install minimum version 5.1.2 system software on the IP304. The latest version
system software is available on the Konica FTP site.

1. FM22 (E-RDH cooling fan) is not turning on, due to an open ICP7 on the DCPS1.
Replace DCPS1 (p/n 55FA84510). To check for 24V DC on ICP7 perform the following;
a. Power the copier ON.
b. Set multimeter 200V DC range.
c. Locate ICP7 on the DCPS1, next to CN2.
d. Attach the black meter lead, to frame ground.
e. With the red meter lead check both sides of ICP7 for 24V DC.
f. If either side does not have 24V DC replace your DCPS1.
2. FM22 (E-RDH cooling fan) does not turn ON, due to a loss of 24V DC to the DCPS1 at CN2-2.
Check for 24V DC at CN2-2 on the DCPS1. To check for voltage on the DCPS1, perform the
following:
a. Access the 47 mode (power the copier OFF/ON while pressing the 4 and 7 keys
simultaneously).
b. Locate CN2-2 on the DCPS1 in the upper middle section of the DCPS1.
c. Set the multimeter to 200V DC range.
d. Place the black lead to frame ground.
e. Place the red lead on CN2-2, and check for a reading of 24V DC.
f. If there is no voltage present, power the copier OFF.
g. Remove CN2 from the DCPS1.
h. Place the black meter lead to frame ground.
i. Place the red meter lead on CN2-2 and check for 24V DC.
j. If there is no voltage present replace the DCPS1 (p/n 55FA84510).
Note: Before replacing the DCPS1, check for any pinched wires going from FM22 to the DCPS1.
3. The E-RDH cooling fan (FM22) has failed.

Check for loose or pinched wires on CN49 (top of paper exit face), CN95 on the main CB and
intermediate CN127 (located to the right of the main CB). If necessary, replace FM22 (p/n
55FA80540).
DESCRIPTION: E47-2 occurs at power up. SOLUTION ID: 128,540

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The image processing board failed. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Reseat all the connectors at the image processing board and the MCB. If the problem
still exists, replace the image processing board (p/n 55NA-9500)
DESCRIPTION: Change in the paper feed open/close door (p/n 25SA40611). SOLUTION ID: 128,507
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The paper feed open/close door has been changed and additional parts are required to USAGE: 1
properly replace it. The modified door (p/n 25SA40612) is shipped when ordering the paper feed
open/close door (p/n 25SA40611).
SOLUTION: When the open/close door is being replaced, the following additional parts are
required:
QTY DESCRIPTION

72
7060
1 Jam clearance plate/front (p/n 25SA40730)

1 Jam clearance plate/rear (p/n 25SA40500)
2 Jam clearance shaft (p/n 25SA40690)
1 Stopper rubber (p/n 25SA40390)
2 TO screw (p/n 00Z193041)
4 Washer based B tight screw (p/n 00Z253081)
DESCRIPTION: J30-1 when feeding from Tray 1 only. SOLUTION ID: 127,543
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Worn paper feed oscillate roller assembly. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Replace paper feed oscillate roller assembly (p/n 55FA-4110).
DESCRIPTION: How to enable the 7060/IP302 printing system to pull from multiple input trays within a print SOLUTION ID: 125,926
job.
SOLUTION: To enable the 7060 printing system to pull from multiple input trays within a print job, software USAGE: 1
switch settings 14-3 and 14-4 must be turned on. To do this, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode on the main body of the 7060 by powering OFF the printer using the main
power switch on the top left hand side of the machine. Power the machine back on while holding
down the 2 and 5 keys on the key pad simultaneously. Continue to hold down the 2 and 5 keys
until a menu appears on the operation panel.
2. Select option 1 software switch settings.
3. Using the arrow keys on the LCD display, scroll until software switch 14-3 is displayed. Press
the ON button that is displayed on the right hand side of the LCD display.
4. Using the arrow keys on the LCD display scroll until software switch 14-4 is displayed. Press
the ON button that is displayed on the right hand side of the LCD display.
5. Power the machine OFF/ON to resume normal operation.
DESCRIPTION: No power to the machine after servicing the fuser. Leakage breaker may be open. SOLUTION ID: 125,856
SOLUTION: CAUSE: There is a possibility that after replacing the fuser rollers or the fuser lamps, TH1 AC USAGE: 1
leads may break due to a deteriorated plastic housing. This in turn may cause the AC wiring to
short to frame ground.
SOLUTION: Periodically inspect the plastic coated housing for TH1 and replace as needed (p/n
540088420). Additionally, take extra care after replacing fuser rollers and or fuser lamps and
inspect the wiring and plastic housing of TH1 thoroughly.
DESCRIPTION: E41-2 during copy mode. SOLUTION ID: 124,349

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Optics stop position data has been corrupted. Timing adjustment standard setting recall USAGE: 1
does not resolve the error.
SOLUTION: Perform the optics stop position automatic adjustment by performing the following:
2. Access 47 mode (hold down the 4 and 7 keys while powering the copier ON), output code 031,
press Start/Print.
3. Power machine OFF/ON and run a copy after warm up to verify operation.
DESCRIPTION: FRONT DOOR IS OPEN PLEASE CLOSE message at power up. The door is closed. SOLUTION ID: 124,305
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The LCT feed motor (M140) has failed, causing the 24V DC and 40V DC output voltages USAGE: 1
from the DCPS to become grounded.
SOLUTION: To check the LCT feed motor, perform the following:

2. Remove the main CB. Access to the LCT feed motor will be available through an opening in the
main CB mounting plate.
3. Disconnect the 40V DC power supply to the LCT feed motor at CN203, which is located on the
LCT feed motor board.
4. Reinstall the main CB and power the machine ON.
5. If the FRONT DOOR IS OPEN PLEASE CLOSE message is no longer displayed on the
touchscreen, the LCT feed motor is the short source. Replace the LCT feed motor (p/n
55FA-1820) as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: Developer spew SOLUTION ID: 124,774

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failed charge corona unit. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To check the charge corona unit, install electrical tape on top of the front and rear
charge corona end caps. Make copies and check for developer spew. If developer spew is

73
7060
present, replace the corona unit (55FA-2500)
DESCRIPTION: LT351, J51-02 occurs during copy mode. SOLUTION ID: 124,174
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The connector for the LT351 to the main body has a connector pin backed out and/or USAGE: 1
deformed.
SOLUTION: Remove the LT351 connector from the main body (located at the rear of the main
body on the lower left side when standing at the rear of the machine) and check for a loose or
deformed pin.
DESCRIPTION: How to run the conveyance belt on the DF310 in 47 mode. SOLUTION ID: 121,884
SOLUTION: To run the conveyance belt on the DF310 in 47 mode, perform the following. USAGE: 1
1. Turn the machine OFF.
2. Enter the 47 mode (turn the machine ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys).
3. To run the belt, use the 47 multimode, output code 65, press P-03-P. Press Start
4. To run the belt in the reverse direction, use the 47 multimode, output code 65, press P-04-P.
Press Start.
DESCRIPTION: F51-9 after replacing the main CB. SOLUTION ID: 121,402
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Poorly seated optic sensor harness (CN9) on the main CB, resulting in loss of SGND to USAGE: 1
the optics ADF-EE sensor (PS2), optics shading sensor (PS3), paper feed restart sensor (PS4),
optics return sensor (PS5), and optics timing sensor (PS7).
SOLUTION: To check the optic sensor harness connection, perform the following:
2. Remove CN9 from the main CB.
3. Ensure that all pins for CN9 on the main CB are straight and properly aligned especially the
lower right pin (CN9-A1).
4. Inspect CN9 on the wiring harness; ensure that all the wires are properly attached to the
connector.
5. Reseat CN9 to the main CB.
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent F91 during operation. SOLUTION ID: 118,582

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Faulty transfer/separator corona. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Replace the transfer/separator corona (p/n 55FA-2601) to resolve the problem.
Note: F91 is not a programmed failure code.
DESCRIPTION: J31 while copying. SOLUTION ID: 118,396

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The end of the electrode release lever is under the conveyance guide plate causing the USAGE: 1
two sections of the guide to sag in the middle. The section of the conveyance guide plate to the left
of the T/S corona will stick up and catch the lead edge of the paper.
SOLUTION: Ensure that the electrode release lever (p/n 55FA45140) is properly installed with the
end on top of the conveyance guide plate (p/n 55FA45190). The electrode release lever is green
and labeled as number one.
DESCRIPTION: J16 occurs with the paper folded at the drum. SOLUTION ID: 117,681
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The ON/OFF timing of the separation claws were not set to recommended specifications. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To set the separation claw ON/OFF timing perform the following:
3. Using the up/down arrows perform the following
4. Separation claw ON setting;
6-3 6-2 6-1 6-0
0 1 0 0
5. Separation OFF setting;
6-7 6-6 6-5 6-4
1 0 0 0
DESCRIPTION: Black copies. SOLUTION ID: 117,556

74
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failed Image processing board. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Replace the Image processing board (p/n 55FA-9500).

Note: Internal test patterns will print out fine.
DESCRIPTION: 2:2 and 2:1 modes are unavailable (grayed out). SOLUTION ID: 114,846
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The ADU has been disabled (25 mode software switch 13-5 is set to a 1 (ON)). USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To enable the ADU, perform the following:

1. Access the 25 mode (hold down the 2 and 5 keys at power up).
2. Select [1] (SOFTWARE SWITCH SETTINGS)
3. Using the up and down arrows, scroll to SOFTWARE SWITCH 13-5.
4. Press OFF to set SOFTWARE SWITCH 13-5 to a 0.
6. Power copier OFF/ON to return to normal copy mode.
DESCRIPTION: Unable to access the 25, 36, or 47 diagnostic modes. SOLUTION ID: 114,535
SOLUTION: CAUSE: One of the operation panel keys is stuck in the actuated position, locking out all input to USAGE: 1
the main CB from other keys on the operation panel.
SOLUTION: Inspect all keys on the operation panel and ensure that they operate properly. Repair
the key that is not allowing proper operation. Replace the operation unit (p/n 55FE-7000) as
necessary.
DESCRIPTION: Wavy distortion near the center of the copy. SOLUTION ID: 112,278
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A failed T/S corona or incorrectly set currents. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Renew/replace the T/S corona unit (p/n 55FA-2601) and confirm the corona currents.
The corona currents are set at the factory. To view the initial and current set values, perform the
following:
2. Enter the 47 mode, (turn the machine ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys), input code 94,
press the Start Print button.
3. The values will now be displayed.
Note: If the main CB is changed, the NOVRAMs must be exchanged to maintain the memory.
DESCRIPTION: F43-2 during warm-up. SOLUTION ID: 111,082

SOLUTION: CAUSE: L1 (exposure lamp) has dislodged and is not making proper contact with the lamp USAGE: 1
terminals.
SOLUTION: Re-install L1 and ensure that it is making contact with the lamp terminals.
Notes:
1. Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet.
2. Do not touch the L1 with bare hands.
3. Be sure to install L1 with the maker's mark facing the front side of the main body and the nipple
facing the paper feed side.
DESCRIPTION: How to check the amount of SIMMs memory installed. SOLUTION ID: 106,589
SOLUTION: To check the amount of SIMMs memory installed, perform the following: USAGE: 1
1. Access the 47 mode (power the copier ON while pressing the 4 and 7 keys), output code 197.
2. The amount of installed memory will be displayed.
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, Jamming in position 13. SOLUTION ID: 103,457

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failed PS18 (roller shift position sensor). USAGE: 1

1. Access the 47 multimode (power the machine ON, while holding down on the 4 and 7 keys),
2. Actuate PS18; a change of state should occur on the control panel.
3. If no change occurs, replace PS18 (p/n552085510).
DESCRIPTION: Delay in copy process after the Start button is pressed. SOLUTION ID: 100,248

75
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The polygon mirror motor idle speed is set too slow. The motor has to reach full speed USAGE: 1
before the copy process begins.
SOLUTION: To adjust the idle speed of the polygon mirror, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode (while holding down on the 2 and 5 keys, power the machine ON).
2. Press [1: Software Switch Setting] on the touchscreen.
3. Use the up/down arrows to increment to software switches 5-3, 5-4, and 5-5.
4. Use the following chart to change the setting:
5-5 5-4 5-3 Mode
0 0 0 No Rotation
0 0 1 14000rpm
0 1 0 11024rpm
0 1 1 8000rpm
1 0 0 Stop
5. Press the Previous Screen button on the touchscreen to return to the memory setting mode.
Note: No Rotation will not slow down the mirror motor at idle and will not produce any delay (this
setting might emit a slight high-pitched noise at idle). Stop will produce the longest delay (without
any high-pitched noise at idle).
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, PS23 (exit detect 2) not listed in the 7060 Parts Catalog (June 1999). SOLUTION ID: 100,233
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect documentation. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: The Parts Department is currently in the process of locating a part number for PS23.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, PLEASE LOAD 8.5x11 PAPER IN ANY TRAY OTHER THAN BYPASS message when SOLUTION ID: 100,030
running copies from the DF310.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: ATS/APS was disabled for all 8.5x11 paper trays. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To enable ATS/APS for at least one 8.5x11 paper tray, perform the following:
2. Press [9, Memory Switch].
message bar.
4. Switch numbers 9-13 allow trays 1-5, respectively, to be enabled/disabled for ATS/APS.
5. Press the Change Setting Contents key to select a specific setting of that item which is
displayed on the lower line of the message bar.
6. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN.
7. Power the machine OFF/ON to exit the Key Operator Mode.
DESCRIPTION: Can the fixing temperature be changed by the end user? SOLUTION ID: 99,102
SOLUTION: By selecting the Thick Paper Mode the end user can raise the fixing temperature. No other USAGE: 1
temperature adjustments are available for the end user.
DESCRIPTION: MISHANDLED PAPER displayed in idle mode. SOLUTION ID: 98,664

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The actuator for the bypass photosensor (PS30) is not in its proper position. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Reinstall the actuator for PS30 and verify proper operation.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, the pin count of the finisher CB EPROM does not match the socket of the finisher SOLUTION ID: 98,028
CB.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Although, the socket on the finisher CB (p/n 122H-9010) has 32 pins, the proper EPROM USAGE: 1
for the FS103A finisher CB (p/n 122H-9510) has only 28 pins.
SOLUTION: Install the EPROM with pin number 1 located at the top of the socket toward the
paper exit side of the finisher. The two upper and lower pin openings on the paper entrance side of
the socket will be empty.
DESCRIPTION: How to disable the display of the cancel printing message after the Stop button is pressed. SOLUTION ID: 96,311
SOLUTION: This feature can not be disabled. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: J11 from tray 1 (8.5x14 and 11x17 papers only). SOLUTION ID: 96,541

76
7060
SOLUTION: CAUSE: PFU conveyance clutches (MC2 and MC1) and intermediate conveyance rollers are worn USAGE: 1
and slipping.
SOLUTION: Replace MC1 and MC2 (p/n 55FA82040), the 4 upper intermediate feed rollers (p/n
25SA-4851) and the lower intermediate roller (p/n 55FA40490) as needed.
DESCRIPTION: Are the transfer and separation blocks available individually? SOLUTION ID: 96,478
SOLUTION: The complete T/S corona assembly (p/n 55FA-2601) must be replaced as an unit. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: FS108B, compatibility with the 7060. SOLUTION ID: 78,892

SOLUTION: The FS108B is not compatible with the 7060. The 7060 uses either the FS103A (PCUA 950779) or USAGE: 1
FS103B (PCUA 950805) finishers. The FS108B is only used with the 7065 or 7075.
DESCRIPTION: Jamming at the 1500 tray conveyance section (conveyance section above Tray 3). SOLUTION ID: 66,332
SOLUTION: CAUSE: As paper feeds across the mylar paper regulation sheet in the 1500 tray conveyance USAGE: 1
section, static electricity can be generated, causing paper to jam.
SOLUTION: Carefully remove the paper regulation sheet (p/n 55FA5931). Take care removing the
paper regulation sheet to ensure no adhesive tape remains on the paper guide plate. If any
adhesive does remain on the paper guide plate, use alcohol or acetone to remove it.
Note: For machines in which A4R size paper is frequently loaded in tray 4, please remove the
conveyance pressure spring/2 (p/n 25SA4091).
DESCRIPTION: When the Auto Reset button is pressed, Non-Image Erase is disabled. SOLUTION ID: 60,847
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Auto Reset key function is not set to Full Auto. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To program Auto Reset key function, perform the following steps:
2. Access the Key Operator Mode (press and hold the Help key while powering the machine ON).
3. Select [9] Memory switch.
4. Select No.2: AUTO/RESET key function.
5. Press Change Settings Content.
6. Select Full Auto.
DESCRIPTION: ADU drive clutch slipping. SOLUTION ID: 59,880

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Grease from the fixing drive gear is entering the ADU drive clutch causing it to slip. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: The clutch shaft (B) (p/n 55FA50811) and the ADU drive clutch (p/n 55FA82210) have
been changed to prevent grease from entering the clutch.
Note: The new style clutch shaft (B) can be used with the new or old style ADU drive clutch. The
new style clutch should be used only with the new style clutch shaft (B).
See [[7060 Parts Information Bulletin #92| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJC089.bmp SCROLL]] for more
information.
DESCRIPTION: Are the separator claws on a 7060 compatible with the 7050? SOLUTION ID: 52,818
SOLUTION: No, the 7060 separator claws are not compatible with the 7050. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: How to program any LCT for 8.5x14 paper. SOLUTION ID: 52,534
SOLUTION: Trays 3 (1000 sheet), 4 (1500 sheet), and 5 (LCT) cannot be programmed to use legal size paper. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: Universal tray lifts when it is pulled out to load paper. SOLUTION ID: 50,755
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A faulty size detect board was giving the indication that the cassette was inserted which USAGE: 1
in turn allow drive to the paper lift motor.
SOLUTION: Ensure that the detection switches are operating properly and not bound up. Replace
the paper size detection board as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, part number for the wiring cable, which is attached to CN402 on the main SOLUTION ID: 77,917
CB and CN463 on the image I/F board.

77
7060
SOLUTION: To obtain the wiring cable 5, which is attached to CN402 on the main CB and CN463 on the image USAGE: 1
I/F board order p/n 123P9015.
DESCRIPTION: Ozone output level, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 69,864

SOLUTION: The following are the specifications for ozone emissions: USAGE: 1
The ozone output for the 7060 at initial setup/after PM is 0.02 parts per million (ppm).
The ozone output for the 7060 at PM is 0.05 parts per million (ppm).
DESCRIPTION: Is there a fusing unit repair kit for the shaft to the fixing idler gear (p/n 25SA77250)? SOLUTION ID: 90,632
SOLUTION: There is no kit to repair the shaft to fixing idler gear (p/n 25SA77250). Replacement of the Fixing USAGE: 1
main frame assembly (p/n 55FA-5310) will be required if the fixing idler gear shaft is excessively
worn. To prevent failure of the shaft on the fixing idler gear, ensure the shaft is lubricated at time of
PM.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, sort and non-sort copies are exited to the sub-tray. However, stapled sets are SOLUTION ID: 89,785
exited to the shift tray.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The FS103 sub-tray has been programmed for production, which causes all copies other USAGE: 1
than stapled sets to be exited to the sub-tray.
SOLUTION: To program the finisher to exit sort and non-sort mode copies to the shift tray, perform
the following:
3. Touch [1. Software switch setting] on the touchscreen.
4. Select software dipswitch #2 using the left up/down arrow on the touchscreen.
5. Touch [OFF] on the touchscreen, 2-0 : 0 should now be displayed in the dark band at the top of
the touchscreen.
6. Select bit #1 using the middle up arrow on the touchscreen.
7. Touch [OFF] on the touchscreen, 2-1 : 0 should now be displayed in the dark band at the top of
the touchscreen.
DESCRIPTION: What adjustments need to be done after the write unit is replaced? SOLUTION ID: 89,570
SOLUTION: The following 36 mode adjustments must be performed after the write unit is replaced: USAGE: 1
1. The centering adjustment.
2. The gradation adjustment.
3. The laser side pitch offset.
DESCRIPTION: When feeding 8.5x14 originals through the ADF with legal paper in the universal tray, an SOLUTION ID: 87,147
error message indicates to load 8.5x14 paper in any tray but bypass.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Tray 1 ATS/APS is disabled. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To set ATS/APS for Tray 1, perform the following:

1. Hold down the Help key while powering ON the 7060
2. Touch 9 MEMORY SWITCH
3. Touch up/down arrows to ATS/APS SWITCH (TRAY 1)
4. Touch Change Settings Contents to ON.
5. Power the 7060 OFF/ON.
DESCRIPTION: Should all the EPROMs be replaced as a set? SOLUTION ID: 85,767
SOLUTION: When replacing EPROMs, they should be done as a complete set. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: J21 occurs when running 600dpi. SOLUTION ID: 85,557

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The Separation DC was set too low in the 36 mode. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: There is no set adjustment for the Separation DC. However it can be changed, and
should only be performed as a last resort item. To adjust the Separation DC, perform the following:
1. Access the 36 mode (power the machine ON while down on the 3 and 6 keys).
Touch the [Next adjustment] key until Separation DC appears in the message display box.
4. HV adjustment (separation DC) appears and a number is also on the screen.
5. Using the numeric keypad add 10 to the number that is in the screen and touch the [set] key.

78
7060
DESCRIPTION: A thin black line on the trail edge of the copies SOLUTION ID: 84,166
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The standard data was not set in the 36 mode. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To set the standard data in the 36 mode, perform the following:
1. Access the 36 mode (power the machine ON while holding down on the 3 and 6 keys.
2. Press [2] Timing adjustments.
3. Press [9] Recall standard data.
4. Select All timing adjustments.
5. Press YES.
6. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end this recovery mode.
DESCRIPTION: After loading Tray 3, it will not rise when any key is pressed. SOLUTION ID: 82,375
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A dirty LCT upper limit sensor (PS142). USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Clean PS142. The signal from PS142 can be checked at CN120-B6 on the main CB.
DESCRIPTION: The second side copy is upside down when duplexing (1:2 mode) A4R originals onto SOLUTION ID: 82,159
8.5x11R paper.
SOLUTION: This is normal operation when A4R originals are duplexed in the 1:2 mode. USAGE: 1
To correctly duplex A4R originals, perform the following:
1. Insert originals, in the RADF original tray, in the A4 direction (portrait).
2. Select 1:2 duplex mode.
3. Set Vertical Magnification to 0.95%.
4. Set Horizontal Magnification to 1.00%.
5. Select an 8.5x11 paper tray.
6. Save these settings in Job Memory.
DESCRIPTION: With APS/AMS and auto rotation selected, paper is not selected from the bypass tray. SOLUTION ID: 81,903
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This is normal operation. The bypass tray is not included as part of the APS/AMS loop, USAGE: 1
even though the machine detects the paper size in the bypass.
SOLUTION: The bypass tray is designed for feeding special paper (i.e., thick paper,
transparencies, labels, etc.). Do not expect it to function as a regular paper tray.
DESCRIPTION: LT351, Tray 5 is grayed out after installation. SOLUTION ID: 80,975
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Tray 5 was isolated via 25 mode dipswitch settings. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Refer to revised 25 mode in the 7060 Service Manual page 6-5.
To program Tray 5 selection, perform the following:
1. Power OFF the main switch, turn the main switch back on while holding down 2 and 5 of the
copy quantity setting buttons.
2. 25 Mode Screen will appear. This is the 25 mode where the normal copy operation becomes
unavailable.
3. Select 1 Software Switch Settings.
4. Select DIP switch number. Use the left up arrow key, to 13.
5. Select bit number of the switch with the far right up arrow key to 4.
6. Select ON(=1) or OFF(=0), to enable Tray 5 select 0.
7. Software Switch set mode should appear as the following: 13 - 4 : 0 00
Note: Normal default is 0 from factory. To isolate other trays select dip switch as follows:
13 - 0 = 0 or 1 Tray 1
13 - 1 = 0 or 1 Tray 2
13 - 2 = 0 or 1 Tray 3
13 - 3 = 0 or 1 Tray 4
13 - 4 = 0 or 1 Tray 5
13 - 5 = 0 or 1 ADU as provisional measure.
DESCRIPTION: A thin black line appears on the trail edge. SOLUTION ID: 80,725
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Standard Data Settings in the 36 mode are incorrect. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To reset the Standard Data Settings in the 36 mode, perform the following:
1. Access the 36 mode (power the machine OFF, then, while holding down on the 3 and 6 keys,

79
7060
2. Press 2 timing adjustment.

3. Press 9 Recall Standard Data.
4. Press YES on the screen. The items below will be set to factory settings:
Drum clock/Horizontal adjustment data
Restart timing data
Paper feed loop adjustment data
Leading edge original erasure adjustment data
Optics brake adjustment data
Centering adjustment data
RADF original stop position data
5. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN button.
DESCRIPTION: Can the 4 second delay, from when the last copy exits the finisher and when the READY TO SOLUTION ID: 80,258
COPY message reappears, be changed?
SOLUTION: This is normal operation for the 7060 copier and cannot be changed. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, copies exit to upper tray in non-sort mode. SOLUTION ID: 80,011
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Software dipswitch setting for "Exit to subtray in non-sort" is set to ON. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To disable the setting for "Exit to subtray in non-sort", perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode (power the machine ON while holding down the 2 and 5 keys).
4. Select bit number 1 of the switch using the right up/down arrow.
5. Select OFF (=0) using the ON/OFF selections.
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent J32 and accordion jams. SOLUTION ID: 79,673

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Old-style paper exit plate (B) has not been modified. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: A jam detection mechanism has been added to the fixing unit that allows PS25 (paper
exit photo sensor) to detect accordion jams. This mechanism has been added to production
machines beginning with the serial numbers listed below:
7060 s/n 55FE03390
Force 60 s/n 55ME00341
The new parts, or the new-style fusing unit (p/n 55FE-5301), can be obtained from the Parts
Distribution Center using standard ordering procedures. The following parts are necessary to
modify earlier models:
Paper exit plate (B) (p/n 55NA53012)
Fixing paper exit plate (lower) (p/n 25SA53054)
Spacer (p/n 55NA53021)
Jam detect spring (p/n 55NA53070)
Jam detect plate caulking (p/n 55NA-5330)
Note: A Technical Bulletin will be released soon detailing the changes.
DESCRIPTION: Does the main body display the finisher ROM version? SOLUTION ID: 79,279
SOLUTION: The main body does not display the finisher ROM version, but will display the main CB, operation, USAGE: 1
image process and RADF ROMs. To display the ROMs, perform the following:
1. Enter the 25 mode, (turn the machine ON, while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
2. Select 9: Indication of ROM Version. This display is defined as follows:
C = Main CB
O1 = Operation 1, O2 = Operation 2, O3 = Operation 3, O4 = Operation 4
I = Image process board 1, ("I" has two identical EPROMS and only lists one).
F = Feeder (RADF)
3. Turn the copier OFF, then ON to exit the 25 mode.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, not recognized by the copier. SOLUTION ID: 79,224

SOLUTION: CAUSE: IP3, the 5V DC IP, is open on the finisher CB. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Check the loads supplied by IP3 for a short to ground before replacing the finisher CB
(p/n 122H-9010).

80
7060
DESCRIPTION: How to enable/disable the Weekly Timer. SOLUTION ID: 78,946

SOLUTION: To enable/disable the Weekly Timer, perform the following: USAGE: 1
2. While holding down the HELP key, power the machine ON.
3. Press 8: Weekly Timer.
4. Press 1: Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting.
5. Press the Weekly Timer ON key or the Weekly Timer OFF key.
6. Press the Previous Screen key.
DESCRIPTION: Laser adjustment test pattern looks different in the timing adjustment mode compared to the SOLUTION ID: 78,528
test pattern output mode using code 05.
SOLUTION: This is normal machine operation. The 36 timing adjustment mode allows for calibration of LD1 USAGE: 1
and LD2. The test pattern output during the adjustment shows the changes in the adjustment. The
test pattern used in the 36 test pattern output mode is a static pattern that is not changed by the
adjustment.
DESCRIPTION: When stapling punched paper, the staple is on the wrong side for 2:2 copies. SOLUTION ID: 77,270
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This is due to the order in which the copies are made. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: The paper will have to be loaded in the tray with the holes in the reverse direction
from that used to make one-sided stapled copies.
DESCRIPTION: How to select tandem copy mode. SOLUTION ID: 76,583

SOLUTION: To select tandem copy, press the MODE key on either machine. That machine will become the USAGE: 1
master machine. All originals must be loaded into the master machine. The copying jobs will be
divided between the two copiers.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A/FS103B, 47 mode input/output list. SOLUTION ID: 75,585

SOLUTION: [[FS103A/FS103B/FS104A 47 mode input/output list hyperlink.| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc141.bmp USAGE: 1
SCROLL]]
DESCRIPTION: IP302, 7060 was updated to level 20.0 EPROMs and now will not staple in print mode. SOLUTION ID: 75,567
SOLUTION: CAUSE: If level 20.0 EPROMS are installed in the 7060 and the IP302 is running 3.0.4 system USAGE: 1
software, the 7060 cannot staple in print mode.
SOLUTION: Update IP302 system software to version 3.1.4 (or later). The latest version system
DESCRIPTION: Booklet mode specification. SOLUTION ID: 75,312

SOLUTION: Use the Booklet mode to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of ledger, legal, or USAGE: 1
8.5x11R paper from Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Original images are scanned into memory and
automatically arranged in booklet format in correct order.
Booklet specifications:
1. Scan and store original into the memory, then print all the pages collectively.
2. The memory is available to store up to 1500 pages unless memory overflow occurs.
3. Use RADF.
4. AMS is automatically selected.
5. Copy mode 1:2 is automatically selected. (2:2 mode can be selected.)
6. Original size: One-sided or two sided letter sheets (8.5 x11).
7. Copy size 11x17 or 8.5x11R.
8. Incompatible Basic copying conditions: Using Multi-sheet bypass tray, APS, Group, 1:1, 2:1,
Resolution (Very High)
9. Compatible Applications: Chapter, Image insert, Book copy, Text/Photo enhance, Reverse
image, or the Reduce & shift sub-mode of Image shift.
DESCRIPTION: READY TO COPY is displayed. When the start/print is pressed the machine displays SOLUTION ID: 74,950
PLEASE WAIT WARMING UP. No first feed occurs.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The paper feed motor (M140) does not provide drive to first paper feed. Since the first USAGE: 1

81
7060
feed does not go on, the machine does not display a first feed jam. The motor does go on using 47
multimode output code 21, press P-02-P.
SOLUTION: Replace the M140 assembly (p/n 55FA-1820)
DESCRIPTION: How to configure the LCT Tray 3 and Tray 4 to feed 7x9 paper. SOLUTION ID: 74,785
SOLUTION: The LCT Tray 3 and Tray4 cannot be configured for 7x9 paper. The following are the 7060 paper USAGE: 1
size specifications per paper tray:
TRAY 1 - 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11R, 8.5x11, 5.5x8.5
TRAY 2 - 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11R, 8.5x11, 5.5x8.5, A3, A4R, A4, A5, B4, B5R, B5, B6, F4
TRAY 3 - 8.5x11, A4, B5
TRAY 4 - 8.5x11, 8.5x11R, A4, A4R, B5, B5R
TRAY 5 (LCT optional) - 8.5x11, A4
DESCRIPTION: Does the PM kit contain the toner collection roller assembly? SOLUTION ID: 74,730
SOLUTION: The PM kit (PCUA 950666) does contain the toner collection roller assembly which is also USAGE: 1
compatible with the 7060. The toner collection assembly (p/n 55TA-2040) can be ordered
separately, if needed.
Note: A single PM kit (Item Number 950666) is now available for use with the 7060, 7065, 7150,
and FORCE 60. The 7060 PM kit (Item Number 950785) has been discontinued and is no longer
available. The following restrictions and changes apply to this new PM kit:
1. The 7060/7150/FORCE 60 dust proof filter (p/n 25SA-6940) is included in the kit, but it must be
used only for the models indicated because of its size (cannot be used on the 7065).
2. The 7065 dust proof filter (p/n 55TA-6940) is not included in the kit, and must be ordered
separately.
3. A single collection roller assembly (p/n 55WA-2040) is now available for use with all these
models. It is not included in the kit and must be ordered separately.

SCROLL]].
DESCRIPTION: What is the PCUA number for the fax option? SOLUTION ID: 74,266
SOLUTION: There is no fax option for the 7060. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: How to copy both sides of a document (i.e. checks) onto one side of the copy. SOLUTION ID: 73,980
SOLUTION: To program the overlay function, perform the following: USAGE: 1
1. In idle mode, press the APPLICATION key.
2. Press Combination.
3. Press OVERLAY.
4. Press OK twice.
5. Select the desired paper size.
6. Place original on the platen glass and close the document feeder.
7. Press the SET key.
8. Place the next original on the platen glass in a position other than the previous original.
9. Press the SET key.
10. Press the START PRINT key.
DESCRIPTION: Black area on copy between images when using non-image area erase with multiple small SOLUTION ID: 72,825
originals.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The machine cannot differentiate between multiple small originals and a single original. USAGE: 1
The multiple small originals are treated as a single original and inside areas between originals are
not erased.
SOLUTION: Close document feeder cover when making copies of multiple small originals.
DESCRIPTION: F52-1 appears at power up SOLUTION ID: 72,687

SOLUTION: CAUSE: FM16 Main Fan Motor or the Main Control Board has failed. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To check FM16 Main Fan Motor perform the following:

1. Access the 47 multi mode ( power the machine OFF, then , while holding on the 4 and 7 keys,
power the machine ON ) input code 42 P-01-P.
2. Press the print button. If M16 does not come on, replace M16Main Fan Motor ( p/n
55FA80520). If M16 does come replace the Main Control Board ( p/n 55FA-9010 ).

82
7060
DESCRIPTION: Weight specifications. SOLUTION ID: 72,513

SOLUTION: 7060 - 426.8lbs USAGE: 1
DF310 - 30.8lbs
FS103A or FS103B - 110lbs (each)
LT351 (optional) 55lbs
DESCRIPTION: Can the 7060 operate without a finisher installed? SOLUTION ID: 71,791
SOLUTION: The 7060 can be run without a finisher, with a conventional exit tray installed. Since the machine is USAGE: 1
not shipped with an exit tray, it will be necessary to order a 7060 exit tray (p/n 540012114).
Note: This configuration is recommended ONLY if the 7060 is used as a copier.
DESCRIPTION: Is a Spanish version EPROM available? SOLUTION ID: 71,257

SOLUTION: Not at this time. The engineering department is in the process of developing a Spanish version USAGE: 1
EPROM for this product. When the EPROM is released, notification will be released via a
Technical Bulletin.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, after completion of warm-up when the START/PRINT key is pressed, the original is SOLUTION ID: 71,253
fed through the RADF and ADD PAPER TO ANY TRAY EXCEPT THE BYPASS is displayed.
However, all paper trays are full.
CAUSE: Job memory auto recall is ON, and job memory number 15 has conflicting program
selections, which are confusing machine operation at initial power up.
SOLUTION: Review program selections in job memory number 15, if necessary turn the job
memory auto recall function OFF. To turn the job memory auto recall function OFF, perform the
following:
2. Enter the Key Operator Mode (power the copier ON, while pressing the HELP key).
3. Touch [9. Memory switch] on the touchscreen.
4. Touch the down arrow on the touchscreen 5 times, until [No. 18: Job memory auto recall
function] is displayed at the top of the touchscreen.
5. Touch [change setting contents] on the touchscreen, until [OFF] is displayed at the top of the
touchscreen.
DESCRIPTION: How to enable the ROTATION feature. SOLUTION ID: 70,700

SOLUTION: To enable the ROTATION feature for a machine that has Main CB EPROM level 14.0 and below, USAGE: 1
3. Select 9, Memory Switch.
4. Using the arrows, scroll to No. 21, Rotation.
5. Using the Change Contents button, selection the desired option ( OFF, ON, or APS/AMS only).
To enable the ROTATION feature for a machine that has Main CB EPROM level 15.0 and above,
3. Select 1, Initial Setting.
4. Select 6, Finish.
5. Select AUTO.
DESCRIPTION: F28-3 and/or erratic operation. SOLUTION ID: 82,969

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Arcing from the high voltage power supply (B) wiring connection at the fastener terminal USAGE: 1
can burn holes in the electrode support rail. Once these holes are created, arcing at the electrode
guide plate can continue and result in leakage, erratic operation, and, in some cases, F28-3
(separation output voltage abnormal discharge) code generation.
SOLUTION: To prevent the arcing, the shape of electrode input connector (B) (p/n 25SA73231)
has been modified to extend over and protect the high voltage wire connection at the fastener
terminal. See [[7060/7150/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #29| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc210.bmp
SCROLL]] for more information.

83
7060
DESCRIPTION: Can mixed originals be used with the combination mode? SOLUTION ID: 69,402
SOLUTION: Mixed originals cannot be used with the combination mode. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: How to program the FS103B to output pages face up (document printing). SOLUTION ID: 68,424
SOLUTION: To program the FS103B to output pages face up, perform the following: USAGE: 1
2. Hold down the 2 and 5 keys, and power the machine ON.
4. Use the up down arrows to increment to software switch 14-3.
6. Use the up down arrows to increment to software switch 14-4.
7. Press the OFF button to change the data to O.
8. Press the previous screen button on the touchscreen to return to the memory setting mode
window.
DESCRIPTION: Tray 1 will not function with APS although the paper can be selected manually. SOLUTION ID: 68,229
SOLUTION: CAUSE: ATS/APS for tray 1 is disabled. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: To enable ATS/APS for tray 1, perform the following:

1. Power ON the machine while holding the HELP button.
2. Press 13 for memory switch.
3. Press the DOWN ARROW once.
4. Press the DOWN arrow on the right of LCD until ATS/APS tray 1 is highlighted.
5. Press EDIT until ON is displayed.
6. Press RETURN.
DESCRIPTION: What is the proper diagnostic procedure for adjustment of printer gradation after installing SOLUTION ID: 67,828
the video interface kit?
SOLUTION: There are two different procedures that have been distributed with video interface kits. The USAGE: 1
following is the proper procedure:
1. Access the 47 mode, output code 120 and wait for the machine to display FIN (Power ON the
machine while pressing 4 and 7).
2. Access 47 mode, output code 113 and wait for the machine to display FIN.
3. Access 47 mode, output code 120 and wait for the machine to display FIN.
4. You are now ready to perform laser adjustments as outlined in the video interface kit
instructions.
DESCRIPTION: What is the page capacity of the E-RDH? SOLUTION ID: 67,015
SOLUTION: The E-RDH Specifications are as follows: USAGE: 1
Standard Memory Configuration 16MB has a capacity of 90, 8.5x11 pages with 6% fill in normal
mode.
Maximum Memory Configuration 128MB has a capacity of 1,500, 8.5x11 pages with 6% fill in
normal mode.
Note: Page coverage and special image quality modes (High and Very High Modes) reduce
memory capacity.
DESCRIPTION: Please Insert Key Counter is displayed at power up. SOLUTION ID: 66,887
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Connector 35 on the main CB is disconnected. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Reconnect CN35 on the main CB.
DESCRIPTION: Can cover insertion and sheet insertion be used together with the bypass tray and duplex SOLUTION ID: 66,177
mode?
SOLUTION: No, use of the bypass tray does not allow duplexing. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: Unable to adjust LD1 and LD2 within specifications. SOLUTION ID: 65,870
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The data stored in the Test Pattern Density mode is too low. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Increase the data in the Test Pattern Density mode by increments of 10. Perform the

84
7060
following to set the data:

2. Press and hold the 3 and 6 keys and power the copier ON.
3. Select number 5, Test Pattern Density mode.
4. Increase the data by 10 and press the set key.
5. Perform the LD1 offset and LD2 offset adjustments.
6. Increase the data by 10 until the LD1 and LD2 adjustments are within specifications.
DESCRIPTION: No power, or lights are displayed and RL1 does not energize. SOLUTION ID: 65,761
SOLUTION: CAUSE: No change of state at CN60-B7, RL1 CONT signal. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Replace RL1 (p/n 25SA88460).

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Poorly seated connector on the DCPS. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Inspect and reseat all connectors on the DCPS (p/n 55FA84510).
DESCRIPTION: How to clear a jam when the machine indicates that lever 2 should be rotated and the fuser SOLUTION ID: 64,208
pulled out.
SOLUTION: To clear the jam, perform the following: USAGE: 1
1. Open the front door.
2. Move lever 2 to the right.
3. Pull out the fuser unit using lever 2.
4. Once the fuser is fully extended the cover can be opened. It will stay in the vertical position
while the jam is cleared.
5. To close the fuser cover, lift the green handle about 1/8 inch and rotate back to the closed
position.
DESCRIPTION: IP302/KN301, can a mail merge print job be accomplished on a connected unit? SOLUTION ID: 64,027
SOLUTION: As long as the application supports mail merging. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, paper exit jams occur if the START/PRINT key is pressed while PLEASE REMOVE SOLUTION ID: 63,638
COPIES FROM FINISHER is displayed.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The finisher firmware has been updated to disable the START/PRINT key until the tray is USAGE: 1
emptied and the message is cleared
SOLUTION: Update the finisher CB, IC5 to level 14 EPROMs (p/n FS103AA05-14.0). The
firmware can also be downloaded from the Konica Bulletin Board System (KBBS).
See [[FS103/FS103A Technical Bulletin #6| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc098.bmp SCROLL]] for more
information.
DESCRIPTION: Erratic operation when using the repeat mode, or photo mode. SOLUTION ID: 62,178
SOLUTION: CAUSE: There is interference from a light source above the copier. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Lower the document feeder or reposition the copier away from the light source.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, APS is not selecting Tray 3 and Tray 4. SOLUTION ID: 61,850
CAUSE: APS is disabled in the Key Operator Mode for Tray 3 and Tray 4.
SOLUTION: To enable/disable ATS/APS for a particular paper tray, perform the following:
2. Press item 9, for Memory switch.
message bar. Press the Change Setting Contents key to select a specific setting of that item which
is displayed on the lower line of the message bar.
4. Switch numbers 9-13 allow trays 1-5, respectively, to be enabled/disabled for ATS/APS.
DESCRIPTION: What is the copy speed when using 11x17 paper? SOLUTION ID: 60,708

85
7060
SOLUTION: The copy speed is approximately 38 copies per minute. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: MT516, can the CFF be used as a forms feeder on the 7060? SOLUTION ID: 60,303
SOLUTION: The MT516 CFF (PCUA 946245) will not be tested or supported for use on the 7060. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: No power from the DC power supply. SOLUTION ID: 58,508

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The lower PFU door interlock sensor is broken. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Replace the door interlock sensor (p/n 540085510).
DESCRIPTION: How to program the preheat temperature for the auto low power mode. SOLUTION ID: 57,866
SOLUTION: There are no preheat temperature settings for the auto low power mode. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: How to disable the T/S corona cleaning operation. SOLUTION ID: 56,946
SOLUTION: To disable the T/S corona cleaning operation, perform the following: USAGE: 1
4. Press the ON key to disable the T/S corona cleaning operation.
DESCRIPTION: How to disable the charge corona cleaning operation. SOLUTION ID: 56,945
SOLUTION: To disable the charge corona cleaning operation, perform the following: USAGE: 1
4. Press the ON key to disable the charge corona cleaning operation.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, F77-2 occurring when running a large volume of 11x17 paper. SOLUTION ID: 56,229
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The weight of the large number of 11x17 copies in the tray is causing excessive drag on USAGE: 1
the shift tray which binds the tray up/down motor (M3).
SOLUTION: Adjust the position of the shift tray on the front and rear up/down wires so that the
lower limit photosensor (PS3) is actuated sooner by the shift tray. This will give a full tray indication
earlier in the copy run.
DESCRIPTION: Using 60lb. paper there is a black band on the lead edge of the copy. SOLUTION ID: 55,874
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This paper exceeds specifications. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: The specification for special paper is 14lb. to 16lb., 24lb. to 36lb. Note: Special paper
should only be fed from the bypass tray.
DESCRIPTION: How to level the finisher. SOLUTION ID: 55,517

SOLUTION: To level the finisher, perform the following: USAGE: 1
1. The casters on the exit side of the finisher are adjustable.
2. Place a wrench on the nut of the caster. Either raise, or lower the caster(s) to level the finisher.
DESCRIPTION: When feeding originals through the RADF, part of the second page is on the first page. SOLUTION ID: 55,466
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Memory switch 4, for Erasure outside area of original, in the key operator mode is set to USAGE: 1

86
7060
Erased for APS/AMS only.
SOLUTION: In the key operator mode set memory switch 4 to Area outside of original erased, as
follows:
2. Power the machine ON while holding down the Help key.
3. Press 9 for Memory switch.
4. Press the up arrow to advance to memory switch 4 for Erasure outside area of original.
5. Press the Change Settings Contents key to select Area outside of original erased.
6. Press the previous screen key.
DESCRIPTION: Letterhead mode is not available. SOLUTION ID: 55,194

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The insert tray is not selected in the driver. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Select the insert tray in the print driver.
DESCRIPTION: Is it possible to use chapter insertion while printing from the 7060? SOLUTION ID: 54,417
SOLUTION: Chapter insertion is only available in the copier mode. This feature is not available in the printer USAGE: 1
mode.
DESCRIPTION: What is the CPM (copies per minute) for different paper sizes at 400dpi and 600dpi? SOLUTION ID: 54,339
SOLUTION: Table for CPM at 400dpi: Table for CPM at 600dpi: USAGE: 1
Paper Size CPM Paper Size CPM
5.5x8.5R 61 5.5x8.5R 51
8.5x11 60 8.5x11 50
8.5x11R 51 8.5x11R 42
8.5x14 42 8.5x14 35
11x17 36 11x17 30
DESCRIPTION: Abnormal noise from the upper PFU. SOLUTION ID: 54,334
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The noise is generated by the upper conveyance paper feed clutch (MC8). USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Clean the clutch surfaces and bushings. If necessary replace MC8 (p/n 25SA82030).
DESCRIPTION: How to insert letterhead into a print job. SOLUTION ID: 54,270
SOLUTION: To insert letterhead into a print job, perform the following: USAGE: 1
1. Right click on the printer icon, select properties.
2. Select the Device Options Tab.
3. In Printer Features, select Special Modes, then select Change Settings for and select
Letterhead Mode.
4. In Printer features select Insert Tray and select the tray for the letterhead paper.
5. Click Apply then OK, letterhead insertion is prepared to print.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, J13 when 8.5x11R copies exit into the upper tray. SOLUTION ID: 54,233
Level 13.0 EPROMs provide the option of having all non sort copies exit into the upper tray. When
this feature is enabled (dipswitch 14-1 set to 1) 8.5x11R paper stops at the entrance of the finisher
and J13 occurs.
DESCRIPTION: Can the amount of time before ENTER PASSWORD is displayed be adjusted? SOLUTION ID: 53,725
SOLUTION: To adjust the amount of time before ENTER PASSWORD is displayed in the ECM mode, perform USAGE: 1
the following:
1. Power the machine OFF. While holding down the HELP key power the machine ON. Enter the
4-digit key operator passcode and touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen.
2. From the touch screen press 9 for Memory switch.
3. No.1 : Auto reset timer is the first option.
4. Press the Change Setting Contents to select the reset time preferred from OFF to 300 seconds
in interval of 30 seconds.
If no further changes are required, touch Previous Screen key.

87
7060

Note: See the User's Manual pages 10-43 through 10-45 for this procedure.
DESCRIPTION: Can I pull paper from the manual feed inside a print job?. SOLUTION ID: 53,685
SOLUTION: No, the only time a different paper can be selected is by size change. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: When turning on the 7060 the Konica screen comes up and stays that way. SOLUTION ID: 53,519
SOLUTION: The lock lever for the fuser was not down. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: What is the rotation feature? SOLUTION ID: 53,510

SOLUTION: Rotation is a function that enables the copying of original documents onto 8.5x11 or 5.5x8.5 USAGE: 1
regardless of the copy paper loading direction. By default, rotation requires APS or AMS to
function.
DESCRIPTION: Are the image processing units interchangeable between the 7050 and 7060? SOLUTION ID: 53,444
SOLUTION: The image processing units are not interchangeable between the 7050 and 7060. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: Is the 7050 write unit interchangeable with the 7060? SOLUTION ID: 53,443
SOLUTION: The write units are not interchangeable between the 7050 and 7060. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: Change in front door. SOLUTION ID: 53,070

SOLUTION: In order to enhance the door mounting strength, the front door has been changed. Listed below USAGE: 1
are the changes in part numbers:
Name old p/n new p/n
Front door 25SA12022 25SA12023
Front stopper plate none 25SA12240 (qty of 2)
Front door screw 25SA98020 25SA98020 (increase qty from 3 to 6)
Door switch actuator 454011200 no longer used
Front door actuator none 25SA12230 (qty of 1)
To replace old style with current style the front door must replaced with (p/n 25SA12023), 3
additional front door screws (p/n 25SA98020) must be ordered and added, and the old style door
switch actuator must be replaced with the new style (p/n25SA12230).
The upgraded door assemblies have been factory installed beginning with s/n 55FE0837
DESCRIPTION: Paper jam at position 12 during multiple copying in duplex mode. No copies are exiting the SOLUTION ID: 53,026
ADU.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: An external key counter was attached to the machine. This device was providing the ON USAGE: 1
signal for paper feed clutches 151 and 152 at the same time which resulted in the jam.
SOLUTION: Disconnect and replace the key counter device.
DESCRIPTION: A4 does not work in the mixed original mode. SOLUTION ID: 52,958
SOLUTION: A4 will not work in the mixed original mode. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: Can the insert mode be used with mixed originals? SOLUTION ID: 52,502
SOLUTION: Sheet insertion can not be used with mixed original mode. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: Can the DF308 be installed on a 7060? SOLUTION ID: 52,389

SOLUTION: Only the DF310 document feeder is available for this model. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: Is there an overlay copy mode. SOLUTION ID: 51,940

SOLUTION: OVERLAY copying is available on the 7060. It allows two different originals to be joined together USAGE: 1
on one copy.
Note: Refer to page 8-12 of the 7060 User's Manual.

88
7060
DESCRIPTION: What is the part number for the service manual? SOLUTION ID: 51,858
SOLUTION: The part number for the 7060 service manual is CSM-7060. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: No jam indication with copy paper at the temporary stop sensor. SOLUTION ID: 51,655
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Binding toner drive system caused the toner drive gear to break sending false feedback USAGE: 1
to main CB.
SOLUTION: Do not add toner before shipping the machine as the toner will pack causing binding
in the toner drive system. Inspect the toner drive system by removing motor cover (p/n
25SA32051). Replace the toner supply gear (p/n 540077410) or other drive gears as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: When using the document feeder the copies come out sorted. SOLUTION ID: 51,577
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The 7060 and 7050 both produce copies this way through the document feeder. It has to USAGE: 1
do with the documents being scanned into memory. When using the document feeder for multiple
copies on digital copiers, the originals are scanned into memory to keep the pages together as a
set.
SOLUTION: Select Very High mode. This will process originals in the through put mode (will not
scan documents into memory). This allows copies to be made as a first in first out basis.
DESCRIPTION: Can the start date be edited to match the machine install date? SOLUTION ID: 51,472
SOLUTION: The start date is actually the date of manufacture. This cannot and will not be changed. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: Fuser upper & lower roller part number information. SOLUTION ID: 51,351
SOLUTION: Upper fuser roller is (p/n 55FA53191). USAGE: 1
Lower fuser roller is (p/n 55FA53200).
DESCRIPTION: Marks or soiling on the rear side of paper feed from trays 1 and 2. SOLUTION ID: 51,090
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The paper base actuator (p/n 25SA40200) was changed in production to reduce the USAGE: 1
possiblity of first feed jam. The initial change can allow contact of the feed tires and paper in the
upper two trays (when not feeding paper). This may result in marks or soiling on the rear side of
the paper.
SOLUTION: To eliminate the soiling problem a spacer was added to the under side of the paper
feed oscillate plate (p/n 25SA40150). The redesigned paper base actuator and spacer were
installed on machines with serial numbers 55FE00020 through 55FE00223. If the machine falls
within the serial number range, upgrade to the current design. The current configuration has a
redesigned [[paper base actuator| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJH065.BMP SCROLL]] (p/n 25SA40202)
which is gray in color. This eliminates the spacer that was added to the [[paper feed oscillate plate
| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJH066.BMP SCROLL]](p/n 25SA40150). This change was incorporated on
machines with serial number 55FE00224 and above. This is the recommended configuration.
Note: When installing the paper base actuator (p/n 25SA40202), the spacer is to be removed from
the paper feed oscillate plate (p/n 25SA40150).
DESCRIPTION: Can the 7060 print the time and date on copies? SOLUTION ID: 50,410
SOLUTION: The 7060 cannot print the time and date on copies. USAGE: 1
DESCRIPTION: What does Memory Switch #22 - 1 SHOT Indication Time Selection refer to? SOLUTION ID: 50,314
SOLUTION: This switch setting determines the time duration (3 or 5 seconds) for messages which are displayed USAGE: 1
for short periods and indicate special circumstances such as:
GROUP BUTTON CANNOT BE USED IN THIS MODE
or
NUMBER OF ORIGINALS SHOULD BE -- MAX IN STAPLE MODE
DESCRIPTION: EPA Energy Star compliant, where is the label? SOLUTION ID: 50,258
SOLUTION: The 7060 System Guide, on page 3, indicates that the model 7060 is EPA Energy Star compliant. USAGE: 1
A label can be adhered to the copier front door (p/n ES-LABEL).
DESCRIPTION: How to program shut down after the PM count is reached. SOLUTION ID: 50,192

89
7060
SOLUTION: Copying disable after the PM count has been reached can be changed in 25 mode software DIP USAGE: 1
switch 8-2 (0 for no disable, 1 for disable).
DESCRIPTION: Should the mylars on the transfer guide plate be removed like the 7050 units in Bulletin 14? SOLUTION ID: 50,173
SOLUTION: The transfer guide mylars for the 7060 are not to be removed. 7050 Bulletin 14 refers to a certain USAGE: 1
serial number range which should be adhered to.
DESCRIPTION: Excessive jamming at position 10 (fuser jams). SOLUTION ID: 69,650

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The upper fuser cover is not properly latched, causing contact between the ADU middle USAGE: 1
paper guide plate (inversion gate) and the fuser upper exit guide plate.
SOLUTION: Inspect the fuser upper cover for proper latching. If it is difficult to latch or unlatch, the
cover hinge arms may be contacting the cleaning roller shaft holder assemblies. If contact is
present, loosen the set screws on the shaft holder assemblies and reposition the assemblies until
there is no contact and the upper fuser cover latches and unlatches easily.
DESCRIPTION: F43-2 at power up SOLUTION ID: 136,533

SOLUTION: CAUSE: CN29 was not connected at the CVRB. USAGE: 1
SOLUTION: Connect CN29 at the CVRB.
DESCRIPTION: NO TABLE DATA message during copy process. SOLUTION ID: 137,134
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failed T/S corona unit. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Replace the T/S corona unit (p/n 55FA-2601).
DESCRIPTION: Exit tray part number for a machine without a finisher. SOLUTION ID: 135,211
SOLUTION: To obtain an exit tray, order (p/n 540012114). USAGE: 0
Note: This configuration is recommended ONLY if the 7060 is used as a copier.
DESCRIPTION: Part number for a pin extractor. SOLUTION ID: 134,197

SOLUTION: Pin extractor (p/n 00TL-3030). USAGE: 0
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent J92 during operation. SOLUTION ID: 129,897

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The one-way bearings within the paper exit conveyance pulleys are slipping. These USAGE: 0
pulleys are located on the inversion unit, and are attached to the black conveyance rollers.
SOLUTION: Thoroughly clean the two one-way bearings and roller shafts with alcohol. It may also
be necessary to slightly score the end of the shaft to remove the shiny finish that was created by
the bearing. If problem continues, replace the paper exit conveyance pulleys (p/n 25SA76550).
Note: The symptom may only occur with 8.5x11 paper.
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by Dan Smith, KBT Atlanta.
DESCRIPTION: Intermittent J31 during copy process. SOLUTION ID: 129,889

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Toner has built up on the fuser entrance guide plate which is interfering with paper USAGE: 0
conveyance.
SOLUTION: Clean the fuser entrance guide plate.

SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by Dan Smith, KBT Atlanta.
DESCRIPTION: The machine goes into Power Saver mode at power up. SOLUTION ID: 128,440
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The Weekly Timer is enabled. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Disable or adjust the Weekly Timer OFF setting. To enable/disable the Weekly Timer,
4. Press 1: Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting.
5. Press the Weekly Timer ON key or the Weekly Timer OFF key.

90
7060

To adjust the Weekly Timer ON/OFF settings, perform the following:

4. Press 4: Timer Settings, make desired changes.
DESCRIPTION: J17-01 at idle. SOLUTION ID: 127,975

SOLUTION: CAUSE: A piece of paper is caught in PS19 (optics sync PS). USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Remove paper from PS19 and check the actuator for proper operation. PS19 is
located in the upper paper feed unit before the 2nd paper feed rollers.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, intermittent J72 or miscellaneous main body jam codes during copy process. SOLUTION ID: 126,080
24V DC.
press P-26-P.
DESCRIPTION: FS103, intermittent J72 or miscellaneous main body jam codes during copy process. SOLUTION ID: 126,077
24V DC.
press P-26-P.
DESCRIPTION: Does Konica provide support for Equitrac* products? SOLUTION ID: 125,888
SOLUTION: For technical support information please visit [[http://www.metrics.com/Support/| URL USAGE: 0
http://www.metrics.com/Support/]] or contact trained Support Engineers by telephone at
519.885.2458, by fax at 519.746.7931 or via E-mail at support@metrics.com
Note: Technical Support is available Monday through Friday, 8 AM to 6 PM, EST.
DESCRIPTION: White streaks or lines in the lead-to-trail direction. SOLUTION ID: 125,038
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Dirty or failed write unit. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Clean the last mirror of the write unit. This mirror is located directly above the drum. If
cleaning the mirror does not resolve the white lines, replace the write unit (p/n 55FA-6501).
DESCRIPTION: Is the 7060 compatible with Unify*? SOLUTION ID: 119,065

SOLUTION: Unify is not compatible with the 7060. USAGE: 0
DESCRIPTION: Test Synopsis for Create!form*, Create!form Server and Create!print* printing sample SOLUTION ID: 118,826
forms/data and a custom form/data from Microsoft* Windows 98, Windows 2000
Professional, Windows NT 4.0 Workstation using Windows NT 4.0 Server as the Create!form
Server.

91
7060
SOLUTION: [[Test Synopsis results| URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/TS-CreateFrom.pdf]]. USAGE: 0

Note: To view the above link, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be
DESCRIPTION: Background on copies/prints occurring on longer runs. SOLUTION ID: 117,504

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Excessive heat build up caused by reduced air flow in the drum area. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Ensure that all filters are replaced at the recommended replacement intervals. In dirty
environments, the filters may need cleaning between replacements.
DESCRIPTION: How to submit a file for a current installation or pre-sales printer test in a Windows* or SOLUTION ID: 116,789
Macintosh* environment.
SOLUTION: To submit a file for a current installation or pre-sales printer test in a Windows or Macintosh USAGE: 0
environment, perform the following:
1. Provide the product's current print driver to the customer.
2. Have the customer configure the job as they would like it printed and print the job to a file. This
will eliminate the need for NSSG to have a copy of the specific application and will save time trying
to determine how the document is supposed to be formatted for printing.
Note: Most applications have a 'print to file' option.
3. Submit an SRF (Service Request Form) with the file for review.
DESCRIPTION: User's Manual, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 112,505

SOLUTION: [[7060 User's Manual| URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/urg_7060.pdf]] USAGE: 0
Note: To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded
for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
DESCRIPTION: Light copies. SOLUTION ID: 111,675

SOLUTION: CAUSE: There is a loose connector supplying power to the CCD. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Check for a loose connection at CN401 and reconnect CN401 at the CCD. Also
check the all the wires at CN400 and reconnect CN400.
DESCRIPTION: Paper is 'Z' folded at the second paper feed unit. SOLUTION ID: 109,748
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The PS19 (optics sync PS) actuator failed. USAGE: 0

2. Actuate PS19, it should change state at the the control panel. If it fails replace PS19 (p/n
540085510).
3. If PS19 is good check the actuator (p/n 25SA40520) for wear or grooves. Replace if necessary.
4. Check the actuator spring (p/n 25SA40560). Replace if necessary. If the actuator is replaced it
is recommended to replace the spring.
5. Power the machine OFF/ON to exit the 47 multimode.
DESCRIPTION: How to program the key counter to only increment during copy jobs and not increment SOLUTION ID: 100,582
during print jobs.
SOLUTION: The key counter cannot be programmed so it will only increment during copy jobs and not USAGE: 0
increment during print jobs. The key counter circuit shares the same circuit as the total counter.
The total counter circuit is not able to distinguish between a print job and a copy job.
DESCRIPTION: DF310, F67-0 occurs at power up. SOLUTION ID: 98,496

SOLUTION: CAUSE: A wire from M304 (original push pressure motor) was disconnected. USAGE: 0

92
7060
SOLUTION: There are two wires connected to M304. The connector number on the motor is
CN115-1 and CN115-2. Check the continuity of the wires from CN115-1 to CN103-B10 on the
RADFCB and CN115-2 to CN103-B8 on the RADFCB. If there is a open, repair or replace the
motor M304 (p/n 12GQ-4171) and/or the harness (p/n 12VR90010) as needed.
DESCRIPTION: Code 6 and 8 while copying. SOLUTION ID: 96,852

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The fuser lamp contacts are dirty. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Clean the end contacts of fuser lamp 1 (p/n55FE83030) and fuser lamp 2 (p/n
55FE83040). Also clean terminal plate front (p/n 55FA-5400), lamp support plate A (p/n
55FA-5470) and lamp support plate B (p/n 55FA-5480).
DESCRIPTION: Load any tray with 8.5x11, except bypass when a 8.5x11 original is installed. SOLUTION ID: 95,130
SOLUTION: CAUSE: In 25 mode, dip switch 15-5 is set to 1. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: To set dip switch 15-5 to 0 in 25 mode, perform the following:

1. Access the 25 mode (power the machine ON while holding down on the 2 and 5 keys)
2. Select option [1: SOFTWARE SWITCH].
3. Scroll to dipswitch 15-5.
3. Press [OFF] to select 0..
DESCRIPTION: F67-0 occurs at power-up SOLUTION ID: 95,108

SOLUTION: CAUSE: PS309 failed USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: To check PS309, perform the following.

1. Access the 47 mode (power the machine ON while holding down on the 4 and 7 buttons)
2. Attach a meter to CN102-9 at the RADFCB
3. Check to see if there is a change of state while rotating M304.
4. If there is no change of state clean or replace PS309 (p/n12QV85510).
DESCRIPTION: Varying lead edge on long runs. SOLUTION ID: 53,926

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The second paper feed clutch (MC3) is faulty. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Replace MC3 (p/n 25SA82010). Note: The clutch may become noisy during long
runs.
DESCRIPTION: Blank copies when using the non-image erase, and a non-standard size original. SOLUTION ID: 72,840
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Non-original automatic erasure selection was set to 0 in the 25 mode. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: To set Non-original automatic erasure selection to 1, perform the following:

2. Press [1: Software SW].
3. Scroll to and set the software dipswitch as follows:
DIPSW No. 8-0.
a. Data of 0, Rectangular Erasure.
b. Data of 1, Erasure for Obliquely Placed Original.
DESCRIPTION: Load Any Tray With 8.5x11, Except Bypass appears on the display when using a 8.5x11 SOLUTION ID: 93,019
original,
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Dipswitch 15-5 was set to 1 in 25 mode. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: To prevent the Load Any Tray With 8.5x11, Except Bypass message from appearing,
1. Access the 25 mode (power the machine ON while holding on the 2 and 5 keys).
2. Press the 1 button on the touchscreen to select Software Settings.
3. Use the up/down arrows to increment to software switch 15-5.
5. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to return to the 25 mode.

93
7060
DESCRIPTION: Upper operation cover modification. SOLUTION ID: 86,785

SOLUTION: The upper operation cover has been modified (removal of metal components) to simplify the USAGE: 0
recycling process in the event this cover is discarded. See [[7060/7065/7150/FORCE 60 Technical
Bulletin #31| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc222.bmp SCROLL]] for details.
DESCRIPTION: The Charging Grid contained in the PM kit is mislabeled as the Toner Guide Brush. SOLUTION ID: 83,452
SOLUTION: CAUSE: PM kit contains correct parts. PM Kits manufactured between 12/1999 and 3/2000 were USAGE: 0
incorrectly labeled.
SOLUTION: Ignore incorrect labeling of Charging Grid.
DESCRIPTION: Single PM kit now available for the 7060, 7150 and FORCE 60. SOLUTION ID: 83,086
SOLUTION: A single PM kit (Item Number 950666) is now available for use with the 7060, 7150, and FORCE USAGE: 0
60. The 7060 PM kit (Item Number 950785) has been discontinued and is no longer available.
The following restrictions and changes apply to this new PM kit:

1. The 7060/7150/FORCE 60 dust proof filter (p/n 25SA-6940) is included in the kit, but it must be
used only for the models indicated because of its size (cannot be used on the 7065).
2. A single collection roller assembly (p/n 55WA-2040) is now available for use with all these
models. It is not included in the kit and must be ordered separately.

SCROLL]].
DESCRIPTION: How to access the Jam or Service codes. SOLUTION ID: 82,034
SOLUTION: To access the Jam or Service codes, perform the following: USAGE: 0
power the machine ON),
2. Press the 1 button on the touchscreen for software switch settings.
3. Use the up/down arrows to increment to software switch 8 - 7.
4. Press the ON button to change data to 1.
5. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN key to return to 25 Mode Screen.
6. Press 4 Data Collection to display the Data Collection - 1 Screen.
7. Pressing "Auto Reset" button enables to display next data collection screen.
Data collection - 1
Data collection - 2
Data collection - 3
Data collection - 4
Data collection - 5
8. Using the Up/Down keys, select the desired data number.
9. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN button to end the operation.
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, the tray lowers for every copy. SOLUTION ID: 81,963
SOLUTION: CAUSE: PS7 actuator failed. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Check PS7 actuator (p/n 12QR48430) for binding or damage.
DESCRIPTION: Code 10 during idle mode. SOLUTION ID: 80,753

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The fuser lamp contacts are corroded. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Clean the lamp contacts (p/n 55FA-5470, p/n 55FA-5480, and p/n 55FA5400) with a
low-abrasive material.
Note: Fuser Lamp replacement is every 600,000 copies.
DESCRIPTION: Can the 7060 be used as a scanner? SOLUTION ID: 79,836

SOLUTION: The 7060 does not have PC scanning capability. USAGE: 0
DESCRIPTION: Is there a print driver for HP-UX*? SOLUTION ID: 77,410

SOLUTION: The tar file is KPHUX12.TAZ in the HP-UX folder on the Konica Digital [[FTP site| FILE USAGE: 0
V:\text\CBC009.txt NEW NoWordWrap]] within the Unix_Utilities folder.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Konica Print Utility V1.2 28 January 1998

94
7060
=========================
Introduction
-----------------
The Konica Print Utility for HP-UX allows use of a Konica printer in a HP-UX environment. These
features are available via:
- kp, an interactive command line utility
- kpp, which allows you to "pop up" kp from within an application
- kpalias, which saves frequently used print commands for later use
- the standard lp command.
System Requirements
--------------------------------
- HP-UX 10.x or greater
- 4MB of disk space
Before Installation
--------------------------
The printer and print server must be installed and operational before installing this software.
Have a PPD file available which matches your printer. PPD files for models 7050, 7060, and 7728
are provided in the installation kit. If a different model printer is installed, it is necessary to get the
correct PPD file from Konica. Copy the file into the ppd directory and set the file ownership and
permissions using:
cp <ppd-file> /etc/lp/ppd
chown lp /etc/lp/ppd/<ppd-file>
chgrp bin /etc/lp/ppd/<ppd-file>
chmod 544 /etc/lp/ppd/<ppd-file>
Installation
---------------
Setting up the printer for use under HP-UX consists of four steps:
1. Setting up the print server.
2. Installing the software.
3. Adding a printer to lp system.
4. Configuring the new printer to use the installed software.
Note: Log on as root to perform the installation.
To install, perform the following:
1. Set up the print server.
a. Set the IP address for the print server if not already set.
arp -s <print-server ip-addr> <print-server ethernet-addr>
b. Make sure it is alive.
ping <print-server ip-addr>
c. Add a hostname for the print server if one is not already defined.
d. Make sure it is usable.
ping <hostname>
2. Install the software.
a. The installation kit is provided as a compressed tar file named KPHUX12.TAZ. Rename this
file to KPHUX12.tar.Z.
mv KPHUX12.TAZ KPHUX12.tar.Z
b. Uncompress and extract the installation kit. This will create a [konica] subdirectory in the
current directory. The installation will only install the files needed by users. All system
administration files, such as the installation script, will remain in the new [konica] subdirectory; they
are not installed anywhere else.
uncompress KPHUX12.tar.Z
tar xvf KPHUX12.tar
c. Go to the [konica] subdirectory and run [kpinstall]. This will copy the files into the appropriate
directories for use with the lp system.
cd konica
./kpinstall
3. Add a printer to the lp system.
a. Shutdown the print system.
lpshut
b. Add the printer using [kpaddprinter]. It is a simple shell script which prompts for the required
information and runs the appropriate [lpadmin] command. It will prompt for the printer name, the
print server host name, and the print server port. The printer name is what users will see; the print
server host name is the one entered above, and the port should entered as PORT_1.
./kpaddprinter
c. Restart the print system.
lpsched
d. Make sure the lp system is running. A few seconds after entering the [lpsched] command, it
should be running. If not, restart it.
ps -e | grep lp
4. Configure the new printer to use the installed software.
a. Configure the new printer by using [kpconfig]. It will prompt for the printer to configure. Select

95
7060
the printer just added.

b. Pick a PPD file which matches your printer. The list of PPD files installed are displayed.
Note: The Konica print utilities will only work with Konica printers.
c. Decide whether a control-D should be appended to each print job. Control-D is the end of
job command, and it is not harmful to always send it. It is optional, as there are rare cases where
this may cause problems. Choose to append control-D unless you have reason not to.
d. Configure "installable options". These are printer-specific options such as additional memory,
which may already have been installed. Select the options which match the printer.
./kpconfig -a
After Installation
-----------------------
At this point, everything should be operational. A sample PostScript* file is provided to test the
installation. If problems printing this file are experienced, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in
the documentation. Using lp:
lp -d<printername> test.ps
Using kp:
kp test.ps
DESCRIPTION: Setup Checklist, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 77,328

SOLUTION: PRELIMINARY STEPS: USAGE: 0
1. Cut off the outer rubber exit rollers on the copier exit.
2. When installing developer, note voltage stamped on drum flange for charge grid voltage
adjustment.
3. Install memory module(s) if requested.
4. Install the Interface Kit if the unit is to be connected.
5. Unless Customer applications warrant otherwise, set up paper drawers as follows:
Drawer 2 - 8.5x14
Drawer 3 - 8.5x11
Drawer 4 - 8.5x11 if no LT 351 or 8.5x11R if LT351 is installed.
6. Perform Document Feeder Height and Alignment.
7. Perform L-Detect: 47 mode, input code 095 (See 7060 Service Manual page 6-55. All
references for page numbers from the7060 Service Manual are from the Second Edition,
December 1998 printing).
Note: To enter 47 mode, turn the machine ON while holding down the 4 and 7 buttons.
8. Perform charge grid voltage adjustment. Enter 36 mode and then press [1:High Voltage Auto
Adjustment] (See 7060 Service Manual page 6-27).
Note: To enter 36 mode, turn the machine ON while holding down the 3 and 6 buttons
9. Perform Dmax Initial setting: 47 mode, input code 013 (See 7060 Service Manual page 6-56).
10. Check Test Pattern Density. Enter 35 mode and then press [5:Test Pattern Density]. Must be
set to 255.
11. Put 11x17 paper in top drawer
12. Perform Laser Gradation Adjustment. Enter 36 mode, press [2:Timing Adjustment] and then
[7:Laser Adjustment] (See 7060 Service Manual Page 6-35 to 6-37). Adjust the following:
a. LD1 and 2 Offset.
b. LD1 and 2 Thick paper Run 11x17 through bypass. These settings will differ from above.
c. Side Pitch. Check for equal density of indicated blocks.
13. Perform Gamma Correction Level Adjustment. Enter 47 mode, input code 014 (See 7060
Service Manual page 6-56).
KEY OPERATOR MODE SETTINGS:

Note: To enter Key Operator mode, turn the machine ON while holding the Help button.
1. Set [1:Initial Settings], [1:Copy Mode] to 1-1.
2. Check and adjust [6:Control Panel Contrast].
3. Adjust the Date and Time by accessing [8:Weekly Timer] and then [3:Date and Time Setting].
4. Perform [6:Control Panel Adjustment] Per Technical Bulletin #1.
5. Set [9:Memory Switches Menu] as follows (See Operators Manual Page 10-43):
[No.1:Auto Reset Timer] Change to 180 seconds (3 minutes).
[No.2:Auto Reset Key Function] Change to Initial Setting.
[No.3:RADF Original Effect] Leave at RADF Selected.
[No.4:Erasure Outside Area Of Original] Change to Erased for APS/AMS only.
[No.5:RADF Frame Erasure Selection] Change to 2mm.
[No.6:Automatic Tray Switching] Change to ON.
[No.7 to No.15] Leave ON.
[No.16:Staple Mode Reset Function] Leave OFF.
[No.17:Key Click Sound] Change to ON.
[No.18:Job Memory Auto Recall Function] Leave OFF.
[No.19:Tray Setting: Sheet Insertion] Leave at Tray 1.
[No.20:5.5x8.5 Size Original Type] Leave on Portrait.

96
7060
[No.21:Rotation] Leave on APS/AMS only.

[No.22:1 Shot Indication Time] Leave at 3 seconds.
6. Select [11:Auto Low Power-Auto Shut Off] as follows (Operators Manual Page 10-51):
a. Set Auto Low Power to 240 minutes.
b. Set Auto Shut Off to 240 minutes.
c. Select "Next Setting" icon.
d. Program Auto Shut Off to Off.
25 MODE:
Note: To enter 25 mode, turn the machine ON while holding down the 2 and 5 buttons.
1. Confirm EPROM levels using [9:Indication of ROM Version] and upgrade as needed.
2. Change the following Software Dip Switch settings using [1:Software Switch Setting] (See 7060
Service manual Page 6-3).
2-2 to 1 (This displays jam codes rather than jam positions)
7-4 to 1 (With 7-5 sets default to 8.5x11 for small originals)
7-5 to 1 (With 7-4 sets default to 8.5x11 for small originals)
7-7 to 1 (Turns off full auto screen)
8-0 to 1 (Eliminates all non image areas in the Non Image Erase Mode)
8-7 to 1 (To access Data Collection modes)
11-5 to 1 (With 11-6 turns on single layer screen on touch panel)
11-6 to 1 (With 11-5 turns on single layer screen on touch panel)
If machine has LT-351
8-4 to 1 (These select Tray 5 when APS is released)
15-0 to 1 (These set ATS order to start at Tray 5)
If machine does NOT have LT-351
8-4 to 1 (These set Tray 3 as first priority)
3. Set [2:Paper Size Setting] to appropriate sizes.
4. Set [7:Telephone Number Setting] (customer support telephone number) to: ----1-800-456-5664.
5. Program [8:Indication of M/C Serial Numbers] with main body and accessory serial numbers.
36 MODE - TIMING ADJUSTMENTS:

Note: To enter Timing Adjustment mode, turn the machine ON while holding down the 3 and 6
buttons. Next, press [2: Timing Adjustment].
1. Perform [1:Drum Clock/Horizontal Adjustment] (See 7060 Service Manual page 6-28 and 6-29)
a. Drum Clock adjustment (scanner) - Adjusts magnification from lead to trail edge. Set for 1:1
exactly (+ enlarges, - shrinks).
b. Drum Clock (printer) - Adjusts internal test chart magnification lead to trail. Measure from
mark to center line. Should be 103mm.
c. Horizontal Magnification. Adjusts magnification front to rear.
2. Perform [2:Restart Timing] adjustment (See 7060 Service Manual Page 6-30 and 6-31).
Notes: Restart timing adjustment (Copier) adjusts restart timing only for copies made in Very High
Mode and does not effect normal copies placed on the glass. Restart timing adjustment (Printer)
adjusts restart timing of all copies printing from E-RDH memory. On the 7060, all normal copies
from the glass come from E-RDH. There is no difference between first and second copy as on the
7050.
a. Restart timing adjustment (Copier): Adjust for proper lead edge timing in Very High mode (+
advances paper timing, - retards paper timing).
b. Restart timing adjustment (Printer): Adjust for proper lead edge timing of copies from the
glass (+ advances paper timing, - retards paper timing).
3. Perform [3:Paper feed loop adjustment]. Check for proper loop at second paper feed roller from
the bypass tray and other trays (See 7060 Service Manual page 6-31).
4. Perform [4:Lead Edge Timing Adjustment] (Lead Edge Deletion). Adjust for proper lead edge
deletion for copies from the glass (See 7060 Service Manual page 6-32).
Note: Lead edge deletion for copies from the RADF is adjusted with 25 mode dip switches 5-6 and
5-7 (See 7060 Service Manual page 6-6).
5. Perform [6:Centering Adjustment] (Front To Rear Zoning). Perform all paper tray, ADU, and
original centering adjustments. Negative amount moves image to the front (See 7060 Service
Manual page 6-33 and 6-34).
6. Perform [8:Original Position Adjustments]. Performs the RADF Original Stop Position
adjustment (See 7060 Service Manual page 6-38).
FINAL SETUP:
1. Run 25 copies out of each paper tray including the bypass tray.
2. Make 50 2-sided copies to use as originals, run two sets (2:2).

97
7060
3. Fill out History sheet for machine. (Use a meter reading of "1")
4. Print out the Jam Log sheet for machine.
5. Retain a copy of the History sheet, Jam Log sheet, Potential test chart, and this checklist and
turn in to your Group Leader or Field Manager.
6. Place the History sheet and the Jam Log sheet in a packing slip holder on the back cover of the
machine, or in the User's Guide holder.
DESCRIPTION: UNDEFINED SCREEN CODE 1359H message appears when ZOOM is selected on the SOLUTION ID: 76,913
touchscreen.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The error will occur if the following three criteria are all met: USAGE: 0
1. C1/C2 EPROMs are level 18.0 and onwards. To determine the EPROM level, perform the
following:
a. Turn the machine OFF.
b. Enter the 25 mode, (turn the machine ON, while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
c. Select 8: Indication of ROM Version.
d. Turn the copier OFF, then ON to exit the 25 mode.
2. Direct Selection Screen is selected (software switch 11-5 is 1). To select Direct Selection
Screen, perform the following:
a. Turn the machine OFF.
b. Enter the 25 mode, (turn the machine ON, while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
c. Select 1: Software Switch Setting.
d. Use the arrows on the LCD to select dipswitch 11-5.
e. Touch the ON key on the LCD to change the data to 1.
f. Turn the copier OFF, then ON to exit the 25 mode.
3. Destination software switch is set for Japanese specification (software switch setting 4-2 is 0 and
4-3 is 0).
SOLUTION: Set destination software switch for USA (4-2 to 1 and 4-3 to 0). To select USA as the
destination, perform the following:
2. Enter the 25 mode, (turn the machine ON, while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
3. Select 1: Software Switch Setting.
4. Use the arrows on the LCD to select dipswitch 4-2.
5. Touch the ON key on the LCD to change the data to 1.
6. Use the arrows on the LCD to select dipswitch 4-3.
7. Touch the ON key on the LCD to change the data to 0.
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, sub-machine does not select the same tray that is selected in the main SOLUTION ID: 76,900
machine.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Image information read in the main machine is sent to the engine parts in the main USAGE: 0
machine and the sub-machine. Each machine carries out the copy output operation in accordance
with the settings of each machine. Therefore, the information of the tray set in the main machine is
not reflected on the sub-machine.
SOLUTION: This is a control based on operation specification, therefore it cannot be changed.
DESCRIPTION: Power Saver mode does not function properly even when the POWER SAVER button is SOLUTION ID: 76,881
pressed. The machine is connected with an IP controller, but the IP controller is turned
OFF.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Failure of main CB. Under the condition which the failure occurs, the machine recognizes USAGE: 0
by mistake that auto reset is operated when the Power Saver button is pressed as one of improper
resistance on the main CB. However, the failure does not occur in all machines but only occurs in
some machines as resistance value varies within the tolerance range.
SOLUTION: Replace the main CB (p/n 55FO-9010 and onwards) which contains applied
countermeasures.
DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, sub-machine displays SET THE PAPER OTHER THAN BYPASS TRAY and SOLUTION ID: 76,876
then the operation panel locks.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The setting for the Key Operator mode, memory switch number [4] ERASURE OUTSIDE USAGE: 0
OF ORIGINAL is set to a value of ERASED FOR APS/AMS ONLY.
SOLUTION: Set the Key Operator mode, memory switch number [4] ERASURE OUTSIDE OF
ORIGINAL to a value other than ERASED FOR APS/AMS ONLY. To change this setting, perform
the following:
1. Power the machine ON while holding the ?-HELP button.
2. Press [9] MEMORY SWITCH.

98
7060
3. Press the up arrow to select [4] ERASURE OUTSIDE OF ORIGINAL.

4. Press CHANGE SETTING CONTENTS to select a value other than ERASED FOR APS/AMS
ONLY.
5. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN.
DESCRIPTION: What is the part number for the complete Drum Carriage assembly? SOLUTION ID: 83,267
SOLUTION: The part number is 55FA- 9903 USAGE: 0
DESCRIPTION: Where is the toner lot number located on the toner bottle? SOLUTION ID: 75,698
SOLUTION: The toner lot number is scribed onto the edge of the toner bottle "cap". It is very difficult to read, USAGE: 0
therefore, it needs to be highlighted with a black marker or toner. To locate the number, run a
finger along the flat edge of the cap.
DESCRIPTION: How to change the paper settings in the bypass tray. SOLUTION ID: 75,660
SOLUTION: This cannot be done on this model. USAGE: 0
DESCRIPTION: FS103A, how to lower the exit tray using the 47 mode. SOLUTION ID: 75,293
SOLUTION: To lower the FS103A exit tray, perform the following: USAGE: 0
output code 75, press P-66-P.
2. Press the PRINT button.
DESCRIPTION: NO TABLE DATA when ADF is closed. SOLUTION ID: 74,976

SOLUTION: CAUSE: The 7060 is equipped with ROMs C1/C2 version 18.0 or higher and the dipswitch setting USAGE: 0
for destination is set to Japan specification (4-2 is 0 and 4-3 is 0)
SOLUTION: Set dipswitch 4-2 to 1 and 4-3 to 0.
DESCRIPTION: Addition of detection mechanism for accordion jamming. SOLUTION ID: 73,936
SOLUTION: CAUSE: A mechanism has been added to the fuser to detect an accordion jam. When a jam USAGE: 0
occurs in the fuser paper exit section, paper exit plate/B is pushed down and the photosensor
(PS25) senses the jam by means of the operation of the jam sensor plate and actuator. The serial
number cut in is 55FE03390. See [[7060/Force 60/7150/7065 Technical Bulletin # 27| IMAGE
V:\bitmaps\cjc179.bmp SCROLL]] for more information.
SOLUTION: Machines before the cut in serial number can be converted to the newer style using
the following four parts:
Paper exit plate/B (p/n 55NA53012)
Spacer (55NA53021)
Jam detect spring (p/n 55NA53070)
Jam detect plate assembly (p/n 55NA-5320)
DESCRIPTION: Blank copies when using Erasure outside area of original, and a non standard size original. SOLUTION ID: 73,907
SOLUTION: CAUSE: In 25 mode (non-original automatic erasure solution) Bit 0 was set to 0. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: To set 25 mode (non-original automatic erasure solution) Bit 0 to 1, perform the
following:
2. Press the 1 button on the touchscreen for software switch settings.
3. Use the up/down arrows to increment to software switch 8 - 0.
4. Press the ON button to change the data to 1.
0 = Rectangular
1 = Erasure for obliquely placed original
5. Press the previous screen button on the touchscreen to return to the memory setting mode.
DESCRIPTION: J15-4 displayed during copying. SOLUTION ID: 73,480

Note: This jam code is not listed in the service manual.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: PS802 (LCT pre try) is ON when MC800 (LT351 1st paper feed) goes ON. If a copy is USAGE: 0

99
7060
being made when a jam occurs, copy operation is stopped after completion of exit of the copy.
SOLUTION: To clear the jam, open the LCT conveyance door and remove the jammed paper and
close it. Open the tray and remove the jammed paper and close it.

SOLUTION: CAUSE: PS200 (LCT pre try (1500)) is ON when SD140 (LCT paper feed (1500)) goes ON. If a USAGE: 0
copy is being made when a jam occurs, copy operation is stopped after completion of exit of the
copy.
close it.

SOLUTION: CAUSE: PS210 (LCT pre try (1000)) is ON when SD141 (LCT paper feed (1000)) goes ON. If a USAGE: 0
copy is being made when a jam occurs, copy operation is stopped after completion of exit of the
copy.
close it. Open the tray and remove the jammed paper and close it.
DESCRIPTION: How to adjust the contrast of the LCD touchscreen. SOLUTION ID: 70,747
SOLUTION: To adjust the contrast of the LCD touchscreen, perform the following: USAGE: 0
2. Turn the copier back ON, while holding down the HELP key.
3. Touch [6 Control panel contrast] on the LCD.
4. To adjust the contrast, press the Up Arrow (Brighter) or the Down Arrow (Dimmer).
5, Press OK to complete the selection.
6. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN on the LCD.
7. Power the copier OFF/ON.
DESCRIPTION: How to enable two counts on the total counter for 11x17 paper. SOLUTION ID: 68,501
SOLUTION: To enable two counts on total counter for 11x17, perform the following: USAGE: 0
1. Access the 25 mode, (power the machine OFF, then, while, holding down on the 2 and 5 keys,
power the machine ON ).
4. Press the ON button to change the data to a 1.
5. Press the previous screen button on the touchscreen to return to the memory setting mode.
DESCRIPTION: How to duplex from the platen glass. SOLUTION ID: 66,623
SOLUTION: Use Memory Copy USAGE: 0
1. Select 1:2 mode.
2. Open the document feeder.
3. Place original FACE DOWN on the platen glass, then close the document feeder.
Note: Place and scan the originals in reverse order of pagination.
4. Press [SET] to scan and store the data into memory. The LED of the [STORE] key will be lit
illuminated. When pressing [SET] does not start scanning, press [STORE] to light the LED then
press [SET].
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all originals are scanned.
6. Enter Print Quantity, using the key pad.
7. Press [START PRINT]. The copier starts printing the job.
DESCRIPTION: Unable to complete printer gradation adjustment in 47 mode, output code 118. [- - -] is SOLUTION ID: 66,059
displayed instead of [FIN].
SOLUTION: CAUSE: This is normal. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: It is no longer necessary to perform printer gradation adjustments in 47 mode, output

code 120 and 47 mode, output code 118. The adjustments that need to be made are 47 mode,
output code 18 followed by 47 mode, output code 14. This change will be reflected in a future
technical bulletin and in the updated installation procedure for the video interface unit.

100
7060
Note: Running 47 mode, output code 120 and output code 118 does not affect printer operation or
print quality. Although, [FIN] may not be displayed when run.
DESCRIPTION: Is there a CFF (Computer Forms Feeder) available? SOLUTION ID: 65,741
SOLUTION: There is no CFF option available for the 7060. USAGE: 0
DESCRIPTION: F20-3 occurs during copy mode. SOLUTION ID: 65,231

SOLUTION: CAUSE: Transfer corona abnormality. The transfer corona wire is caught between the top cover of USAGE: 0
the corona unit.
SOLUTION: Repair or align transfer corona as needed.
DESCRIPTION: Op panel boss, for attaching fixing plate, is cracked. SOLUTION ID: 65,183
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Incorrect screw was used to attach the the op panel fixing plate. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: Verify that the only a [[M4 x 8 tapping screw| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc109.bmp
SCROLL]] (p/n 00Z254081) is being used to attach the fixing plate to the op panel.
DESCRIPTION: FS103B, prints slow in mixed original mode. SOLUTION ID: 63,700
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The 7060 can print mixed originals provided stapling or duplex features are not selected USAGE: 0
and Autoselect is selected for the paper source. When printing to a 7060 with mixed originals, in
the 25 mode, software switch 14-3 MUST be set to a 1. Enabling software switch 14-3 causes the
print engine to slow down when page printing because the size of each page has to be checked
before it can be printed. This is not noticed with the FS103A finisher because all jobs are
document jobs and the engine slowdown only occurs during page printing.
SOLUTION: Because the 7060 has to check the size of each page, this is normal operation for the
printer.
DESCRIPTION: How to program RADF selection when an original is placed in the document feeder tray. SOLUTION ID: 63,298
SOLUTION: To program RADF selection, perform the following: USAGE: 0
1. Access the Key Operator Mode (power the machine OFF, while holding down the HELP key,
2. Select #9 Memory Switch.
3. Select [No. 3: RADF- Original effect].
4. Choose either [RADF Selected] or [RADF + Auto Reset Key Selected].
DESCRIPTION: Microsoft* Word 97 chapter insertion mode (mixed tray) does not operate. All paper is SOLUTION ID: 69,271
pulled from one tray.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The 25 mode dipswitches 14-3 and 14-4 set to OFF (default). USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: In order to print from different trays during the same print job, perform the following:
2. Access the 25 mode (hold down the 2 and 5 keys, and power the machine ON).
3. Press the 1 key on the touchscreen for software switch setting.
8. Press the previous screen button on the touchscreen to return to the memory setting mode
window.
DESCRIPTION: In a Macintosh* environment, before the print job is executed, a PRINTING IN PROGRESS SOLUTION ID: 70,645
message is followed a few seconds later by a READY TO PRINT message indicated on the
printer.
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The initial PRINTING IN PROGRESS message occurs because an active printer is USAGE: 0
queried by the AppleTalk* protocol for availability.
SOLUTION: This is normal operation of the Macintosh printing environment.

101
7060
DESCRIPTION: Difficulty reading ECM count; the numbers sequence too fast. SOLUTION ID: 58,488
SOLUTION: CAUSE: The 1 Shot Indication Time is set to 3 seconds. USAGE: 0
SOLUTION: To set the 1 Shot Indication Time to 5 seconds, perform the following:
2. Access the key operator mode (power the machine ON while pressing the HELP key).
3. Select [9] Memory Switch.
4. Select No.22: 1 Shot Indication Time.
5. Select 5 seconds.
6. Press Previous Screen.
7. Power the machine OFF/ON to exit the key operator mode.
DESCRIPTION: 7060 Product Configurator. SOLUTION ID: 57,207

SOLUTION: [[Product configurator.| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\JRC145.bmp SCROLL]] USAGE: 0
DESCRIPTION: Using interrupt, the original job is cleared or lost at the completion of the interrupt job. SOLUTION ID: 54,303
SOLUTION: CAUSE: Level 14 EPROM programming. USAGE: 0
Note: Level 14 was factory installed in 250 United States machines but was not distributed via
Parts Distribution or available as a download format in the United States.
SOLUTION: Installation of the latest level EPROMs are recommended.
[[EPROM history hyperlink| FILE V:\TEXT\EPROM\7060.TXT NEW]].
DESCRIPTION: Cannot order revision 13.2 EPROMs introduced from Technical Bulletin #7. SOLUTION ID: 53,540
SOLUTION: 7060 Technical Bulletin #7 dated 5/13/98 released version 13.2. This special EPROM allowed USAGE: 0
usage of either the manual bypass tray or tray 5 (LT-351) to provide increased paper capacity when
the thin/thick paper mode is selected. This version is no longer available because of a potential
problem with the firmware.
DESCRIPTION: Fuser drive gear failure. SOLUTION ID: 53,048

SOLUTION: CAUSE: In some environments, it possible that the fixing drive gear B (p/n 55FA77130) will not USAGE: 0
endure the recommended replacement cycle of 900,000 copies.
SOLUTION: Replacement with an upgraded gear B is recommended which is (p/n 544077201).

The upgraded gear has been installed on s/n 55FE01225 and above.
DESCRIPTION: Jam position 1 or 2. Paper tray is empty. SOLUTION ID: 51,084

SOLUTION: Jam indicates no paper feed from tray 1 or 2. USAGE: 0
CAUSE: The paper base actuator (p/n 25SA40200) has hung up causing a false paper detect
situation. The machine attempts to feed a piece of paper but no paper is present.
SOLUTION: The paper base actuator has been redesigned. The first change eliminated the
above problem but may introduce soiling of the rear side of the paper in the tray. To eliminate the
soiling problem a spacer was added to the under side of the paper feed oscillate plate (p/n
25SA40150). This configuration was installed on machines with serial numbers 55FE00020
through 55FE00223.
The current configuration has a redesigned [[paper base actuator| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJH065.BMP
SCROLL]] (p/n 25SA40202) which is gray in color. This eliminates the spacer that was added to
the [[paper feed oscillate plate | IMAGE V:\bitmaps\CJH066.BMP SCROLL]](p/n 25SA40150). This
change was incorporated on machines with serial number 55FE00224 and above. This is the
recommended configuration.
Note: When installing the paper base actuator (p/n 25SA40202), the spacer is to be removed from
the paper feed oscillate plate (p/n 25SA40150).
DESCRIPTION: What print drivers are compatible with Macintosh* OS X (Version 10)? SOLUTION ID: 127,234
SOLUTION: Konica does not currently have native Macintosh OS X print drivers. Printing from Macintosh OS USAGE: 0
9x applications within OS X is supported using the current [[Adobe* PostScript* drivers for
Macintosh| URL

102
7060
http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/product.jsp?product=44&platform=Macintosh]].

103

Konica 7060 Solutions

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Konica 7060 Solutions

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

NSSG SUPPORT SOLUTIONS

7060 - ALL ACTIVE SOLUTIONS

This document is designed as a diagnostic tool, primarily for Konica's support

USER AGREES THAT USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS AT USER'S SOLE RISK

Copyright 2002, Konica Business Technologies, Inc.

DESCRIPTION: EPROM history, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 50,780

See [[7060 EPROM Release Notification version 21.1| URL

*[[Trademark ownership information| FILE V:\TEXT\TRADEMRK.TXT NEW]]

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

Set 25 mode dipswitches:

DESCRIPTION: Light copies. SOLUTION ID: 50,619

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

6. The main CB has failed. Replace the main CB (p/n 55FA-9010).

DESCRIPTION: Unable to adjust lead edge registration. SOLUTION ID: 50,204

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

button; to return to the restart timing adjustment screen.

2. A bad TCS (toner concentration sensor) or associated connector/wire is pinched or damaged.

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

540077410) or other drive gears as necessary.

2. Faulty write unit. Replace the write unit (p/n 55FA-6501).

DESCRIPTION: Memory specifications, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 51,639

Volatile Memory Guarantee Statement

[[Konica Specified SIMM Memory module| IMAGE v:\bitmaps\gjm007.bmp SCROLL]]

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

DESCRIPTION: No power. SOLUTION ID: 54,618

DESCRIPTION: Tandem copier, required EPROM configuration. SOLUTION ID: 50,419

Image processing board

The above list is the minimum recommended configuration.

Note: Tandem printing is now available with the IP302.

[[Latest 7060 Tandem Copier EPROM hyperlink| FILE V:\text\NewROM\7060T.txt NEW

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

DESCRIPTION: ECM information, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 50,321

2. How to set a users copy limit for unlimited copies.

3. How to clear the ECM after a copy has been made.

DESCRIPTION: Drum wrap or separation jam. SOLUTION ID: 51,683

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

DESCRIPTION: Front door is open displayed continuously. SOLUTION ID: 50,790

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

DESCRIPTION: E46-6. SOLUTION ID: 51,072

DESCRIPTION: 7060 supplies information. SOLUTION ID: 49,615

PCUA numbers are as follows:

DESCRIPTION: Noise from Tray 3. SOLUTION ID: 52,856

Image processing board

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

O4, IC18 (p/n 7060218-14.0)

*[[Trademark ownership information| FILE V:\TEXT\TRADEMRK.TXT NEW]]

SOLUTION: Reprogram memory switch by performing the following:

DESCRIPTION: Latest EPROM level, 7060. SOLUTION ID: 60,566

See [[7060 EPROM Release Notification version 21.9| URL

*[[Trademark ownership information| FILE V:\TEXT\TRADEMRK.TXT NEW]]

Image processing board

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

IC29 (p/n 7060B29-16.0)

Image processing board

The following is a complete listing of settings for the dipswitches:

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

SOLUTION: To copy 11x15 onto 8.5x11R, perform the following:

DESCRIPTION: F51-2 at power up. SOLUTION ID: 71,322

Copyright 2002 , Konica Business Technologies, Inc. November 2002

IC23 (p/n 7060123-16.0)

Image processing board

The above list is the minimum configuration.

SOLUTION: Replace the paper conveyance roller (p/n 25SA59170).